Owners Manual

Home , Challenger (train), Dodge, Dodge Challenger

OWNER’S MANUAL 2021 DODGE CHALLENGER 2021 DODGE CHALLENGER

2021 DODGE CHALLENGER

21_LA_OM_EN_USC FIRST EDITION

Canada Store enter and the search ® owners.mopar.ca or Google Play ®

OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE UP-TO-DATE DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST Whether providing information it’s about specific product features, a heritage,tour through taking your vehicle’s knowing what steps to an accident take following youror next scheduling appointment,important wean know app find the you’ll extension of your Dodge brand vehicle. U. S. U. S. mopar.com/om Simply download the app, selectdownload Simply the app, model go your directly enjoy and and get make the app, ride. this To to the App Store keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only). ©2020 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS. ©2020 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS. DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA OF GOOGLE. STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK PLAY APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer. This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and for common questions. Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting and Canadian www.techauthority.com Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143. Dodge brand dealer.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to or use public transportation. cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently WARNING! when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION...... 8 1

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...... 13 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...... 67 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...... 86 4

5 MULTIMEDIA ...... 132 5

6 SAFETY ...... 198 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ...... 252 7 8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...... 275 8 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...... 335 9 10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ...... 344 10 11 INDEX...... 349 11 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2

INTRODUCTION VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .. 21 DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ..30 To Arm The System...... 21 Programming The Memory Feature...... 30 Symbols Key...... 9 To Disarm The System ...... 22 Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS...... 9 Rearming The System ...... 22 To Memory ...... 31 Symbol Glossary ...... 10 Security System Manual Override ...... 22 Memory Position Recall ...... 31 Tamper Alert...... 22 SEATS...... 31 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE DOORS ...... 22 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — KEYS ...... 13 Manual Door Locks...... 22 If Equipped...... 32 Key Fob...... 13 Power Door Locks ...... 23 Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...... 33 SENTRY KEY ...... 16 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry...... 24 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — IGNITION SWITCH ...... 16 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit...... 26 If Equipped...... 34 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...... 16 Automatic Door Locks — Heated Seats — If Equipped ...... 35 REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ...... 18 If Equipped...... 26 Front Ventilated Seats — How To Use Remote Start ...... 18 STEERING WHEEL...... 27 If Equipped...... 36 To Exit Remote Start Mode ...... 19 Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — Vehicles Without Passenger Seating Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — If Equipped ...... 27 Installed...... 36 If Equipped ...... 20 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — Passenger Seat Easy Entry ...... 37 Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped ...... 27 Head Restraints ...... 38 If Equipped ...... 20 Heated Steering Wheel — MIRRORS ...... 39 Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer If Equipped ...... 28 Inside Rearview Mirror ...... 39 Activation — If Equipped...... 21 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ...... 28 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ...... 40 Remote Start Cancel Message — Introducing Voice Recognition ...... 28 Outside Mirrors...... 40 If Equipped ...... 21 Basic Voice Commands...... 29 Power Mirrors...... 41 Get Started...... 29 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped...... 41 Additional Information...... 29 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 49 HOOD...... 64 (HOMELINK®) ...... 41 Front Map/Reading Lights ...... 49 Opening The Hood ...... 64 Before You Begin Programming Ambient Light — If Equipped ...... 49 Closing The Hood...... 65 HomeLink® ...... 41 Dimmer Controls...... 50 TRUNK...... 65 Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels...... 42 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS...... 51 Opening The Trunk ...... 65 Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Windshield Wiper Operation ...... 51 Closing The Trunk...... 66 Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ...... 42 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped...... 52 Trunk Safety...... 66 Programming HomeLink® To A Garage CLIMATE CONTROLS ...... 53 Door Opener...... 42 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions GETTING TO KNOW YOUR Programming HomeLink® To A And Functions ...... 53 INSTRUMENT PANEL Miscellaneous Device...... 43 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...... 56 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...... 67 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Climate — Voice Recognition...... 57 Instrument Cluster Descriptions...... 68 Button...... 44 Operating Tips ...... 57 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY...... 69 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 44 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...... 59 Location And Controls ...... 69 EXTERIOR LIGHTS...... 45 Storage...... 59 Engine Oil Life Reset ...... 70 Headlight Switch...... 45 Illuminated Cupholders — Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) — Multifunction Lever...... 46 If Equipped...... 59 If Equipped...... 71 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — USB/AUX Control ...... 60 Instrument Cluster Display Selectable If Equipped ...... 46 Power Outlets...... 60 Menu Items...... 71 High/Low Beam Switch ...... 46 WINDOWS ...... 62 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — Power Window Controls ...... 62 Message — Electrical Load Reduction If Equipped ...... 46 Wind Buffeting ...... 62 Actions — If Equipped ...... 74 Flash-To-Pass...... 47 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ...... 63 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ...... 76 Automatic Headlights ...... 47 Opening And Closing The Sunroof...... 63 Red Warning Lights ...... 76 Parking Lights ...... 47 Pinch Protect Feature...... 64 Yellow Warning Lights ...... 79 Automatic Headlights With Wipers ...... 47 Venting Sunroof ...... 64 Yellow Indicator Lights ...... 82 Headlight Time Delay ...... 48 Sunshade Operation...... 64 Green Indicator Lights...... 82 Lights-On Reminder ...... 48 Sunroof Maintenance...... 64 White Indicator Lights ...... 83 Fog Lights — If Equipped ...... 48 Ignition Off Operation ...... 64 Turn Signals ...... 48 Blue Indicator Lights ...... 83 Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ...... 49 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ...... 83 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — VEHICLE LOADING ...... 122 Onboard Diagnostic System IF EQUIPPED ...... 95 Vehicle Certification Label ...... 122 (OBD II) Cybersecurity...... 84 Ignition Park Interlock ...... 96 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)...... 122 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ...... 122 PROGRAMS ...... 84 (BTSI) System ...... 96 Overloading...... 123 Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission ...... 96 Loading ...... 123 STARTING AND OPERATING SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE TRAILER TOWING ...... 123 STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 86 CONTROL...... 102 Common Towing Definitions...... 123 Trailer Hitch Classification ...... 124 Manual Transmission — If Equipped ...... 86 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L — Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Automatic Transmission — IF EQUIPPED ...... 102 Weight Ratings) ...... 125 If Equipped ...... 86 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING...... 103 Trailer And Tongue Weight ...... 126 Normal Starting...... 87 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ... 103 Towing Requirements ...... 126 AutoPark...... 88 Cruise Control — If Equipped ...... 103 Towing Tips ...... 129 Cold Weather Operation Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ...... 89 If Equipped...... 106 If Engine Fails To Start ...... 89 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — MOTORHOME) ...... 129 After Starting...... 90 IF EQUIPPED ...... 115 DRIVING TIPS ...... 130 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ...... 90 ParkSense Sensors ...... 115 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ...... 130 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — ParkSense Display...... 115 Driving Through Water ...... 130 ParkSense Warning Display...... 118 3.6L & 5.7L ...... 90 MULTIMEDIA PARKING BRAKE ...... 91 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ...... 118 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ...... 92 Service The ParkSense Rear Park UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...... 132 Six-Speed Manual Transmission ...... 92 Assist System...... 118 CYBERSECURITY ...... 132 Shifting ...... 93 Cleaning The ParkSense System...... 118 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...... 133 Recommended Shift Speeds ...... 94 ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....119 Customer Programmable Features...... 133 1–4 Skip Shift ...... 94 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA...... 120 UCONNECT INTRODUCTION...... 147 Downshifting ...... 95 REFUELING THE VEHICLE...... 121 System Overview ...... 147 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message...... 122 Drag & Drop Menu Bar...... 149 Safety And General Information ...... 149 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5

UCONNECT MODES ...... 150 SAFETY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 150 SAFETY FEATURES...... 198 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...... 252 Radio Mode ...... 151 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 198 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED.... 252 Media Mode ...... 162 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...199 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...... 256 Phone Mode ...... 165 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS...... 204 ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — Preparations For Jacking ...... 257 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ...... 257 IF EQUIPPED...... 177 If Equipped...... 204 Jacking And Changing A Tire ...... 258 Android Auto™ ...... 177 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED...... 261 Apple CarPlay® ...... 180 Operation - If Equipped ...... 208 Tire Service Kit Storage...... 261 Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)...210 Tire Service Kit Components And Tips And Tricks ...... 182 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...... 214 Operation ...... 261 PERFORMANCE PAGES ...... 182 Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....214 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ...... 262 Home ...... 184 Important Safety Precautions...... 214 Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit ...... 263 Timers...... 186 Seat Belt Systems ...... 215 JUMP STARTING ...... 267 Gauges ...... 188 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...223 Preparations For Jump Start...... 267 G-Force ...... 189 Child Restraints ...... 232 Jump Starting Procedure ...... 268 Engine...... 190 SAFETY TIPS ...... 248 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...... 269 Dynamometer (DYNO) ...... 191 Transporting Passengers ...... 248 DODGE DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED...... 191 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED Transporting Pets ...... 248 TRANSMISSION ...... 270 Performance Control — Safety Checks You Should Make Inside FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...... 271 If Equipped ...... 191 The Vehicle ...... 248 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 197 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE...... 273 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Regulatory And Safety Information...... 197 Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models...... 274 Outside The Vehicle...... 250 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Exhaust Gas ...... 250 SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 274 Carbon Monoxide Warnings...... 251 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)...... 274 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Body Lubrication...... 289 TIRES...... 311 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 290 SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 275 Tire Safety Information ...... 311 Exhaust System ...... 291 Tires — General Information ...... 319 3.6L And 5.7L Engines ...... 275 Cooling System ...... 292 Tire Types...... 324 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 280 Brake System ...... 295 Spare Tires — If Equipped ...... 325 3.6L Engine ...... 280 Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...... 327 5.7L Engine ...... 281 Transmission (If Equipped) ...... 296 Snow Traction Devices...... 328 Checking Oil Level...... 282 Manual Transmission — If Equipped ...... 296 Tire Rotation Recommendations...... 329 Adding Washer Fluid...... 283 Automatic Transmission — DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Maintenance-Free Battery ...... 283 If Equipped...... 297 TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...... 330 Pressure Washing...... 284 All Wheel Drive (AWD) — VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ...... 284 Treadwear ...... 330 If Equipped ...... 298 Traction Grades ...... 330 Engine Oil ...... 284 Rear Axle ...... 298 Temperature Grades ...... 330 Engine Oil Filter...... 286 Fuses ...... 298 Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...... 286 Bulb Replacement ...... 308 Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 287 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection...... 289 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7

VEHICLE STORAGE ...... 331 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 336 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE BODYWORK...... 331 3.6L Engine...... 336 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE 5.7L Engine (With Automatic Protection From Atmospheric Agents...... 331 FOR YOUR VEHICLE ...... 344 Body And Underbody Maintenance ...... 332 Transmission) ...... 337 Prepare For The Appointment ...... 344 Preserving The Bodywork...... 332 5.7L Engine (With Manual Prepare A List...... 344 INTERIORS ...... 333 Transmission) ...... 337 Be Reasonable With Requests...... 344 Reformulated Gasoline ...... 337 Seats And Fabric Parts ...... 333 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 344 Plastic And Coated Parts...... 333 Materials Added To Fuel ...... 337 FCA US LLC Customer Center ...... 345 Leather Surfaces ...... 334 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...... 337 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...... 345 Glass Surfaces ...... 334 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 338 Mexico ...... 345 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...338 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands...... 345 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)...... 335 Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...... 338 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ...... 345 BRAKE SYSTEM ...... 335 Fuel System Cautions...... 339 Service Contract ...... 345 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 340 WARRANTY INFORMATION...... 346 SPECIFICATIONS...... 335 ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 341 MOPAR PARTS...... 346 Torque Specifications...... 335 CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 343 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...... 346 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C...... 346 In Canada...... 347 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...... 347 General Information...... 348 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8

8 INTRODUCTION

Dear Customer, Congratulations on the purchase of your new Dodge vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer. When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Dodge best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and care about your satisfaction. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9

9 SYMBOLS KEY VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS These statements are against operating WARNING! WARNING! procedures that could result in a collision, 1 bodily injury and/or death. Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in These statements are against procedures that CAUTION! serious injury or death. could result in damage to your vehicle. A suggestion which will improve installation, NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may WARNING! result in damage. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when using “Track-Use” parts General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier TIP: and equipment: use of the product or functionality.  NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment on public roads. FCA US LLC PAGE REFERENCE does not authorize the use of “Track-Use” equipment on public roads. ARROW Follow this reference for additional information  The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is for race vehicles on race on a particular feature. tracks. To help ensure the safety of the race driver, engineers should supervise the installation of “Track-Use” parts.  FCA US LLC does not authorize the installation or use of any part FOOTNOTE noted as “Track-Use” on any new vehicle prior to its first retail sale. Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the topic.

If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10

WARNING! Red Warning Lights To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: Battery Charge Warning Light  ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equipment before driving on public Ú page 77 roads.  ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat belts when driving on Door Open Warning Light public roads. Ú page 77  In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of Oil Pressure Warning Light your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the Ú page 78 vehicle. Oil Temperature Warning Light SYMBOL GLOSSARY Ú page 78 Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to Ú page 77 follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the Ú definition of each symbol page 69. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light Ú Red Warning Lights page 78

Air Bag Warning Light Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Ú page 76 Ú page 78

Brake Warning Light Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Equipped Ú page 76 Ú page 78 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11

Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light 1 Light Ú page 79 Ú page 77

Trunk Open Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light Ú page 78 Ú page 80 Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped — If Equipped Ú page 79 Ú page 81 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If Yellow Warning Lights Equipped Ú page 80 Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped Ú page 80 Ú page 80 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light Light — If Equipped — If Equipped Ú page 79 Ú page 79 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light — If Equipped Ú page 80 Yellow Indicator Lights Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator Light — Warning Light If Equipped Ú page 81 Ú page 82 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12

Green Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped Ú page 83 Ú page 82 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Sport Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped Vehicle Light — If Equipped Ú page 83 Ú page 82

Park/Headlight On Indicator Light White Indicator Lights Ú page 82 Cruise Control Ready Indicator Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped Ú page 83 Ú page 82 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — Turn Signal Indicator Lights If Equipped Ú Ú page 82 page 83

ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped Blue Indicator Lights Ú page 82 High Beam Indicator Light Ú page 83 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13

13 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS 1 — Unlock 2 — Trunk Open KEY FOB 2 3 — Lock Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which 4 — Remote Start (If Equipped) supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry 5 — PANIC Button (RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped), 6 — Emergency Key Remote Start (if equipped), and remote trunk operation. The key fob allows you to lock or NOTE: unlock the doors and trunk from distances up to In case the ignition switch does not change with approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does the push of a button, the key fob may have a low not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery the system. The key fob also contains an can be verified by referring to the instrument emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the cluster, which will display directions to follow key fob. Ú page 348. NOTE: To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Trunk  The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked Push and release the unlock button on the key if the key fob is located next to a mobile fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice phone, laptop, or other electronic device. within five seconds to unlock all doors. Push This may result in poor performance. and release the lock button on the key fob to  With ignition in the ON position and the lock all doors. vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals commands are disabled. will flash and the illuminated entry system will Key Fob be activated. When the doors are locked, the 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp. To Unlatch The Trunk 1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding This setting can be adjusted in the Uconnect Push the trunk button on the key fob two times the emergency key release (1) on the back Ú system page 133. within five seconds to unlatch the trunk. of the key fob and pull the emergency key out with your other hand. NOTE: Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob  If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob, The recommended replacement battery is one and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the CR2032 battery. vehicle will re-lock and the security system will arm (if equipped). NOTE:  If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is  Customers are recommended to use a open, the doors will lock. The doors will battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket unlock again automatically if the key is left coin battery dimensions may not meet the inside the passenger compartment, other- original OEM coin battery dimensions. wise the doors will stay locked.  Perchlorate Material — special handling may Emergency Key Removal All doors can be programmed to unlock on the apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard- first push of the unlock button through ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa- 1 — Emergency Key Release Button Uconnect Settings Ú page 133. tion. 2 — Emergency Key  NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit When you use the key fob to open any door, the board. courtesy lights, overhead lights, and approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped) will turn on Ú page 49. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15

2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat NOTE: 3. Remove the back cover to access and blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry Separating the case can also be done with a flat replace the battery. When replacing the the two halves of the key fob apart. Make head screwdriver. battery, match the (+) sign on the battery to sure not to damage the seal during removal. the (+) sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils 2 may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. 4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves together.

Programming And Requesting Additional Separating Case With A Flat Blade Screwdriver Key Fobs Emergency Key Removal Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer. NOTE:  Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.  Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and Key Fob Battery Replacement operate the vehicle. Separating Case With A Coin 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The system uses a key fob, keyless push button WARNING! ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to CAUTION!  Always remove the key fobs from the prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed compatible with some aftermarket remote vehicle unattended. to the vehicle can be used to start and operate starting systems. Use of these systems may  For vehicles equipped with Keyless the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key result in vehicle starting problems and loss of Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to fob obtained from another vehicle. security protection. place the ignition in the OFF mode. After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will turn on for All of the key fobs provided with your new Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an three seconds for a bulb check. If the light vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle Ú authorized dealer. This procedure consists of remains on after the bulb check, it indicates electronics page 348. programming a blank key fob to the vehicle that there is a problem with the electronics. In electronics. addition, if the light begins to flash after the IGNITION SWITCH bulb check, it indicates that someone EYLESS NTER O GNITION NOTE: attempted to start the engine with an invalid key K E -N-G — I When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to This feature allows the driver to operate the serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an start the engine but there is an issue with the ignition switch with the push of a button as long authorized dealer. vehicle electronics, the engine will start and as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. shut off after two seconds. SENTRY KEY The START/STOP ignition button has four If the vehicle security light turns on during operating positions, three of which are labeled The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for and will illuminate when in position. The three unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The engine. The system does not need to be armed is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, fourth position is START. During START, RUN will or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by illuminate. of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. an authorized dealer. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

ON/RUN WARNING!  Driving position.  When exiting the vehicle, always remove  All the electrical devices are available (e.g. the key fob from the vehicle and lock your climate controls, etc.) vehicle. 2 START  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.  The engine will start.  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- NOTE: tended is dangerous for a number of START/STOP Ignition Button If the ignition switch does not change with the reasons. A child or others could be seriously push of a button, the key fob may have a low or 1 — OFF or fatally injured. Children should be depleted battery. In this situation, a back up warned not to touch the parking brake, 2 — ACC method can be used to operate the ignition brake pedal or the gear selector. 3 — ON/RUN switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the  Do not leave the key fob in or near the emergency key) of the key fob against the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- The push button ignition can be placed in the START/STOP ignition button and push to dren, and do not leave the ignition of a following modes: operate the ignition switch. vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go OFF in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate  The engine is stopped. power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.  Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,  Do not leave children or animals inside alarm, etc.) are still available. parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior ACC heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.  Engine is not started.  Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power windows) Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold HOW TO USE REMOTE START CAUTION! weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for all ambient conditions before the driver enters Push and release the remote start button on the thieves. Always remove key fob from the the vehicle. key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and NOTE: vehicle unattended. the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain may reduce this range. in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. NOTE: Pushing the remote start button a third time  When opening the driver's door with the igni- WARNING! shuts the engine off. tion in ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime  Do not start or run an engine in a closed To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, will sound to remind you to place the ignition garage or confined area. Exhaust gas and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. in the OFF position. In addition to the chime, contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is NOTE: the message will display “Ignition Or Acces- odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is sory On” in the cluster. poisonous and can cause serious injury or  With Remote Start, the engine will only run  For more information on proper engine death when inhaled. for 15 minutes. starting procedures, see Ú page 86.  Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-  Remote Start can only be used twice. tion of the Remote Start system, windows, REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED door locks or other controls could cause  If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down This system uses the key fob to start serious injury or death. in 10 seconds. the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of 328 ft (100 m). 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

 The park lamps will turn on and remain on  PANIC button not pushed TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE during Remote Start mode.  System not disabled from previous remote To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote  For security, power window and power start event Start system, either push and release the sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled unlock button on the key fob to unlock the  Vehicle Security system indicator flashing when the vehicle is in the Remote Start doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless 2 mode.  Ignition in the OFF position Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security  The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN  Fuel level meets minimum requirement position before the Remote Start sequence system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of can be repeated for a third cycle.  Vehicle Security system is not signaling an the 15 minute cycle, push and release the intrusion START/STOP ignition button. All of the following conditions must be met The Remote Start system will turn the engine off before the engine will remote start:  Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated with another push and release of the Remote Start  Gear selector in PARK WARNING! button on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. Once the  Doors closed  Do not start or run an engine in a closed ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the  Hood closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas climate controls will resume the previously set contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).  Trunk closed odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is  Hazard switch off poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not  Keep key fobs away from children. Opera- pushed) tion of the Remote Start system, windows,  Battery at an acceptable charge level door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped  To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED The climate controls will be automatically system will disable for two seconds after When remote start is active, and the outside adjusted to the optimal temperature and mode receiving a valid remote start request. ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, settings depending on the outside ambient the system will automatically activate front  For vehicles equipped with the Keyless temperature. This will occur until the ignition is defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the placed in the ON/RUN position where the dependent on the ambient temperature. Once message “Remote Start Active — Push Start climate controls will resume their previous the timer expires, the system will automatically Button” will show in the instrument cluster settings. display until you push the START/STOP igni- adjust the settings depending on ambient tion button. conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — — If Equipped” in the next section for detailed If Equipped Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the operation.  following occur: In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS — below, the climate settings will default to  The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds maximum heat, with fresh air entering the F QUIPPED 2500 RPM. I E cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the  Any engine warning lights come on. When remote start is activated, the front and vehicle will enter Mix Mode. rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold  In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)  The Low Fuel Light turns on. weather. The heated steering wheel and driver to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be heated seat feature will turn on if selected in  The hood is opened. based on the last settings selected by the the comfort menu screen within Uconnect driver.  The hazard switch is pushed. Settings Ú page 133. In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically  In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or  The gear selector is moved out of PARK. turn on when remote start is activated, if above, the climate settings will default to MAX  The brake pedal is pushed. programmed in the comfort menu screen. The A/C, Bi-Level Mode, with Recirculation on. vehicle will adjust the climate control settings depending on the outside ambient temperature. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE — Vehicle Security system will provide the following Ú control settings, see page 53. IF EQUIPPED audible and visible signals:  The horn will pulse NOTE: The following messages will display in the These features will stay on through the duration instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to  The turn signals will flash of remote start until the ignition is placed in the remote start or exits remote start prematurely: 2 ON/RUN position. The climate control settings  The vehicle security light in the instrument will change if manually adjusted by the driver  Remote Start Aborted — Door Open cluster will flash while the vehicle is in remote start mode, and  Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open O RM HE YSTEM exit automatic override. This includes the OFF T A T S button on the climate controls, which will turn  Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security the system off.  Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open system: REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER  Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed DE–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED Reset in the OFF position. When remote start is active and the outside The message will stay active until the ignition is 2. Perform one of the following methods to ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), placed in the ON/RUN position Ú page 348. lock the vehicle: the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled.  Push lock on the interior power door lock Exiting remote start will resume previous VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED switch with the driver and/or passenger operation, except if the Windshield Wiper The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle door open. De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless  timer and operation will continue. Push the lock button on the exterior Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized operation. Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid While the Vehicle Security system is armed, key fob available in the same exterior interior switches for door locks and trunk release zone Ú page 24. are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the  Push the lock button on the key fob. 3. If any doors are open, close them. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE TO DISARM THE SYSTEM and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this DOORS occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system. The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed MANUAL DOOR LOCKS using any of the following methods: If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle The power door locks can be manually locked  Push the unlock button on the key fob. Security system will remain armed when the from inside the vehicle by using the door lock  Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will knob. To lock each door, push the door lock the door Ú page 24. flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, knob on each door trim panel downward. To disarm the Vehicle Security system. unlock each door, pull the door lock knob on  Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go ignition button each door trim panel upward. (requires at least one valid key fob in the REARMING THE SYSTEM vehicle). If something triggers the alarm, and no action is NOTE: taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five  The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk seconds between cycles, up to eight cycles if button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the trigger remains active. The Vehicle Security the Vehicle Security system. system will then rearm itself.  When the Vehicle Security system is armed, SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock. Door Lock Knob The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create TAMPER ALERT If the door lock knob is down when you shut the conditions where the system will give you a false If something has triggered the Vehicle Security door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure alarm. If one of the previously described arming system in your absence, the horn will sound the key fob is not inside the vehicle before sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security three times and the exterior lights will blink closing the door. system will arm, regardless of whether you are three times when you disarm the Vehicle in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle Security system. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

NOTE: POWER DOOR LOCKS Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the WARNING! (Continued) The power door lock switches are located on Vehicle Security system.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or each door trim panel. Push the switch to lock or with access to an unlocked vehicle. unlock the doors. WARNING! Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of 2  For personal security and safety in the reasons. A child or others could be seriously event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors or fatally injured. Children should be before you drive as well as when you park warned not to touch the parking brake, and leave the vehicle. brake pedal or gear selector.  Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the  Do not leave the key fob in or near the automatic transmission into PARK or the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- manual transmission into FIRST gear or dren, and do not leave the ignition of a REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from the in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could vehicle and lock all doors, and lock your operate power windows, other controls, or Power Door Lock Switch vehicle. move the vehicle. If you push the power door lock switch while the  When leaving the vehicle, always remove ignition is on, and either door is open, the power the key from the ignition and lock your locks will not operate. This prevents you from vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip- accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle. ment may cause severe personal injuries Turning off the ignition or closing the door will and death. allow the locks to operate. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:  Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, approach (low beams, license plate lamp, laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless position lamps) for whichever time duration signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. may not unlock automatically. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn signal lamps. If a door is open with the ignition either placed in the ACC or ON/RUN (engine not running)  If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/ position, a chime will sound as a reminder. snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE resulting in a slower response time. Grab The Door Handle To Unlock ENTRY  If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry NOTE: The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless vehicle will re-lock and (if equipped) will arm  If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and the Vehicle Security system. programmed, all doors will unlock when you unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to grab hold of the front driver’s door handle. To To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” Ú NOTE: of the door handle, grab the handle to unlock through Uconnect Settings page 133.  Passive Entry may be programmed on/off the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle  All doors will unlock when the front through Uconnect Settings Ú page 133. will unlock the driver door automatically. passenger door handle is grabbed regardless Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock of the driver’s door unlock preference  The key fob may not be able to be detected by both doors automatically. The interior door setting. the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is panel lock knob will raise when the door is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or unlocked. other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key NOTE: (FOBIK-Safe) The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a To minimize the possibility of unintentionally valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped 2 with an automatic door unlock feature which not unlock the doors when any of the following will function if the ignition is in the OFF position. conditions are true: There are three situations that trigger a  The doors are manually locked using the door FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle. lock knobs. Trunk Passive Entry Button 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive  Three attempts are made to lock the doors Entry key fob while a door is open. using the door panel switch and then the NOTE: doors are closed. If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive 2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the  There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside door handle while a door is open. deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either unless another one of the vehicle’s Passive 3. A lock request is made by the door panel Passive Entry door handle. Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle and within switch while the door is open. To Enter The Trunk: 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid. When any of these situations occur, after all With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will of the deck lid, push the button located on the be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob center of the light bar which is located on the inside the car, and it does not find any Passive deck lid above the license plate. Entry key fobs outside the car, the car will unlock and alert the customer. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors: AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either door handle, with power door locks if: pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock both doors. 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled within Uconnect Settings Ú page 133. 2. The transmission gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in PARK. Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking 3. The driver door is opened. NOTE: 4. The doors were not previously unlocked.  After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or NOTE: unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature Push The Door Handle Button To Lock door handle. This is done to allow you to in accordance with local laws. check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle, without the vehicle unlocking. AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — door handle button. This could unlock the IF EQUIPPED door(s).  The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is depleted. The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock The vehicle doors can also be locked by using automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds the key fob lock button or the lock button 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature located on the vehicle’s interior door panel can be enabled or disabled by an authorized Ú page 348. dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer for service. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27 STEERING WHEEL the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING the steering column in position, push the lever COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED upward until fully engaged. This feature allows you to tilt the steering WARNING! 2 column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The Do not adjust the steering column while tilt/telescoping lever is located below the driving. Adjusting the steering column while steering wheel at the end of the steering driving or driving with the steering column column. unlocked, could cause the driver to lose Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column.

POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING WARNING! OLUMN F QUIPPED C — I E Do not adjust the steering column while This feature allows you to tilt the steering driving. Adjusting the steering column while column upward or downward. It also allows you driving or driving with the steering column to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The unlocked, could cause the driver to lose power tilt/telescoping steering column control control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this is located below the multifunction lever on the warning may result in serious injury or death. Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle steering column. To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — WARNING! IF EQUIPPED  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the The steering wheel contains a heating element skin because of advanced age, chronic that helps warm your hands in cold weather. illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica- The heated steering wheel has only one tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys- temperature setting. Once the heated steering ical conditions must exercise care when wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an using the steering wheel heater. It may average of 80 minutes before automatically cause burns even at low temperatures, shutting off. This time will vary based on especially if used for long periods. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display environmental temperatures. The heated  Do not place anything on the steering wheel steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn that insulates against heat, such as a on when the steering wheel is already warm. blanket or steering wheel covers of any type The heated steering wheel control button is and material. This may cause the steering located within the Uconnect system. You can wheel heater to overheat. gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen. UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION  Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element on. INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with  Press the heated steering wheel button a these helpful quick tips. It provides the key second time to turn the heating element off. Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) NOTE: Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display The engine must be running for the heated system. steering wheel to operate. For information on use with the Remote Start system, see Ú page 20. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in GET STARTED the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, The Voice Recognition (VR) button is used to you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display activate/deactivate your Voice Recognition system. system. 2 BASIC VOICE COMMANDS Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:  Reduce background noise. Wind and The basic Voice Commands below can be given passenger conversations are examples of at any point while using your Uconnect system. noise that may impact recognition. Push the VR button . After the beep, say: Uconnect Voice Command Buttons  Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume  “Cancel” to stop a current voice session while facing straight ahead. 1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or Receive A Text  “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice  Each time you give a Voice Command, you 2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Commands must first push the Voice Recognition (VR) Radio, Media, And Climate Functions button, wait until after the beep, then say  “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts your Voice Command. again ADDITIONAL INFORMATION  You can interrupt the help message or Notice the visual cues that inform you of your VR system prompts by pushing the VR button © 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar system’s status. Cues appear on the and saying a Voice Command from the and Uconnect are registered trademarks and touchscreen. current category. Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 348. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect System Support:  Side mirrors  US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or  Power tilt/telescoping steering column call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days (if equipped) a week)  A set of desired radio station presets  Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon- nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or NOTE: 1-800-387-9983 (French)  Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, SiriusXM Guardian™ services support: each can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.  US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/ Memory Settings Switch sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827  Be sure to program the radio presets prior to PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE programming the memory settings.  Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/ To create a new memory profile, perform the The memory settings switch is located on the guardian-v1/ or call: 1-877-324-9091 following: driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED three buttons: NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase the This feature allows the driver to save up to two  The set (S) button, which is used to activate selected profile from memory. different memory profiles for easy recall the memory save function. through a memory switch. Each memory profile  The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN saves desired position settings for the following recall either of two saved memory profiles. position (do not start the engine). features: 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired  Driver seat cushion preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt  Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) (if and telescopic steering column [if equipped) equipped], and radio station presets). 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

3. Push and release the set (S) button on the 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory switch, and then push the desired and release the set (S) button on the memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds. memory switch. When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will The instrument cluster display will display stop moving. A delay of one second will occur 4. Within five seconds, push and release which memory position has been set. before another recall can be selected. button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory 2 NOTE: Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle instrument cluster. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the memory settings are recalled when using in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to 5. Push and release the lock button on the key Passive Entry to unlock the driver's door with a recall a memory profile. fob within 10 seconds. linked key fob. INKING ND NLINKING HE EY OB L A U T K F NOTE: TO MEMORY Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory SEATS Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint of two saved memory profiles by pushing the by pushing the unlock button on the key fob System of the vehicle. unlock button on the key fob. within 10 seconds. WARNING! NOTE: MEMORY POSITION RECALL Before programming your key fobs you must  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, NOTE: select the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in through the Uconnect system Ú page 133. people riding in these areas are more likely PARK, a message will be displayed in the instru- to be seriously injured or killed. To program your key fobs, perform the following: ment cluster display.  Do not allow people to ride in any area of 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF To recall the memory settings for driver one or your vehicle that is not equipped with seats position. two, push the desired memory button number and seat belts. In a collision, people riding (1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob in these areas are more likely to be seri- 2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2. linked to the desired memory position. ously injured or killed. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar WARNING! (Continued) Adjustment located under the seat cushion and move the  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward and using a seat belt properly. you have reached the desired position. Then, by using a bar located by the front of the seat using body pressure, move forward and cushion, near the floor. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! WARNING!  Adjusting a seat while driving may be  Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could is dangerous. The sudden movement of the result in loss of control which could cause a seat could cause you to lose control. The collision and serious injury or death. seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the seat  Seats should be adjusted before fastening only while the vehicle is parked. the seat belts and while the vehicle is Adjusting Bar Location parked. Serious injury or death could result  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so from a poorly adjusted seat belt. that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

Manual Front Seat Recline MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS) To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the WARNING! desired position and release the lever. To return Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and top of the seatback. This could impair 2 release the lever. visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.

Folding Rear Seat Folding Rear Seatback Loop Locations The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in use. Recline Lever NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat WARNING! cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that are left folded for an extended period of time. Folded Rear Seat the shoulder belt is no longer resting against This is normal and, by simply opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion your chest. In a collision you could slide under When the seatback is folded to the upright will return to its normal shape. the seat belt, which could result in serious position, make sure it is latched by strongly injury or death. pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING! The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted  Be certain that the seatback is securely up or down using the power seat switch. The locked into position. If the seatback is not front of the seat cushion will move in the securely locked into position, the seat will direction of the switch. Release the switch when not provide the proper stability for child the desired position has been reached. seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. Power Lumbar — If Equipped  The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle Vehicles equipped with power driver or (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or Power Seat Switch passenger seats may also be equipped with folded down position) should not be used power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is as a play area by children when the vehicle Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward located on the outboard side of the power seat. is in motion. They could be seriously injured The seat can be adjusted both forward and Push the switch forward or rearward to increase in a collision. Children should be seated rearward by using the power seat switch. The or decrease the lumbar support. Push the and using the proper restraint system. seat will move in the direction of the switch. switch upward or downward to raise or lower the Release the switch when the desired position lumbar support. POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) — has been reached. IF EQUIPPED Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The power seat switches are located on the The height of the seats can be adjusted up or outboard side of the front seats. The power seat down by using the power seat switch. The seat switches control the movement of the seat. will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Power Lumbar Switch 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped NOTE: Front Heated Seats This feature provides automatic driver seat The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or The front heated seats control buttons are positioning to enhance driver mobility when disabled through the programmable features in located within the Uconnect system. You can Ú entering and exiting the vehicle. the Uconnect system page 133. gain access to the control buttons through the The distance the driver seat moves depends on HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED climate screen and the controls screen. 2 where you have the driver seat positioned when You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat On some models, the front seats may be you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF settings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen equipped with heaters located in the seat position. buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two cushions and seat backs.  When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, and one OFF position, the driver seat will move about WARNING! for LO. Turning the heating elements off will 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver return the user to the radio screen.  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the seat position is greater than or equal to skin because of advanced age, chronic  Press the heated seat button once to turn 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica- the HI setting on. stop. The seat will return to its previously set tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys- position when you place the vehicle’s ignition  Press the heated seat button a second ical condition must exercise care when in the ACC or RUN position. time to turn the LO setting on. using the seat heater. It may cause burns  The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled even at low temperatures, especially if  Press the heated seat button a third time when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 used for long periods of time. to turn the heating elements off. of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear  Do not place anything on the seat or seat- NOTE: stop. At this position, there is no benefit to back that insulates against heat, such as a the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat  Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be Easy Entry. heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has felt within two to five minutes. When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface  The engine must be running for the heated and Easy Exit positions are stored in each seats to operate. memory setting profile Ú page 30. temperature of the seat. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

 If the HI-level setting is selected, the system FRONT VENTILATED SEATS — VEHICLES WITHOUT PASSENGER will automatically switch to LO-level after IF EQUIPPED SEATING INSTALLED approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will The ventilated seats are equipped with fans All passenger occupants within the vehicle must change from HI to LO, indicating the change. that can be controlled through the climate and be in a seat equipped with a Seat Belt System The LO-level setting will turn off automatically control screen in the Uconnect system. The fans and Head Restraint for the safety of the after approximately 45 minutes. operate at two speeds, HI and LO. passenger. If the passenger and/or rear seats have been removed, do not ride in those areas. For information on use with the Remote Start  Press the ventilated seat button once to system, see Ú page 20. choose HI. This vehicle has been designed to maximize total performance. In doing so, the deletion of WARNING!  Press the ventilated seat button a second passenger seats and/or rear seat may affect time to choose LO. the Noise, Vibration, and Harshness (NVH)  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the characteristics. As a result, the interior will be skin because of advanced age, chronic  Press the ventilated seat button a third louder overall. illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica- time to turn the ventilated seat off. tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys- WARNING! ical condition must exercise care when NOTE: using the seat heater. It may cause burns The engine must be running for the ventilated  If the passenger and/or rear seats have even at low temperatures, especially if seats to operate. been removed, do not ride in those areas. used for long periods of time. For information on use with the Remote Start In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or  Do not place anything on the seat or seat- system, see Ú page 20. killed. back that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat  If this vehicle was not factory equipped with heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has a passenger seat, NEVER attempt to install been overheated could cause serious a passenger seat because the safety burns due to the increased surface systems, including the air bags and seat temperature of the seat. belt, may not properly protect you. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  All occupants, including the driver, should inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat people riding in this area are more likely to if the head restraints are not in place of their be seriously injured or killed. proper positions in order to minimize the risk 2 of neck injury in the event of a crash.  Only ride in available seating positions equipped with seat belt systems. Always  Head restraints should never be adjusted properly wear your seat belt. Failure to do while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a so could result in an increased risk of vehicle with the head restraints improperly Easy Entry Lever serious injury or death in the event of an adjusted or removed could cause serious accident. injury or death in the event of a collision. NOTE:  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat  The front passenger seat needs to slide back and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, PASSENGER SEAT EASY ENTRY to a preset position for the fore-aft adjuster to including the driver, should always wear be properly locked. For example, if the front On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever their seat belts whether or not an air bag is passenger has the seat adjusted full rear and located on the side of the seatback in order to also provided at their seating positions to exits the vehicle to let a rear passenger enter dump the seatback and slide the seat forward. minimize the risk of severe injury or death using the easy entry handle, the fore-aft You can also temporarily remove the seat belt in the event of a crash. adjuster needs to slide back about 2/3 of the from the guide loop on the seat and allow the way rearward to hit the lock position. If the (Continued) seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows for adjuster is not returned to this preset posi- easier access to the rear seat. To return the tion, the seat will appear to be loose. seat to a normal seating position, first return the seatback to its original recline location and  Also, if the front passenger uses the easy entry then slide the entire seat back to the preset lock handle and then lifts up the recliner handle position. without moving the seat back to its original preset position, the recliner will not lock until it is moved to the full recline position. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Driver’s Side Easy Entry WARNING! (Continued) The easy entry lever on the outboard side of the driver’s seatback will dump the seat back  Head restraints should never be adjusted forward to allow for easier access to the rear while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a seats. The seat bottom will not slide forward as vehicle with the head restraints improperly the passenger side easy entry will. If needed, use adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. the driver’s side seat control to slide forward.

To return the seat to the normal position, push NOTE: the seatback up and it will lock into the Do not reverse the head restraints (making the Head Restraint previously set recline position. Then if needed, rear of the head restraint face forward) in an use the seat control to adjust the forward/ attempt to gain additional clearance to the back 1 — Release Button rearward position. of your head. 2 — Adjustment Button 3 — Seat Belt Loop HEAD RESTRAINTS Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk The front driver and passenger seats are To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the of injury by restricting head movement in the equipped with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). head restraint. To lower the head restraint, event of a rear impact. Head restraints should In the event of a rear impact, the RHR will push the adjustment button located at the base be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint automatically extend forward minimizing the of the head restraint and push downward on the is located above the top of your ear. gap between the back of the occupants head head restraint. and the RHR. WARNING! To remove the head restraint, remove the seat The RHR will automatically return to their belt from the seat belt loop. Raise the head  All occupants, including the driver, should normal position following a rear impact. If the restraint as far as it can go. Then, push the not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat RHR do not return to their normal position, see adjustment button and the release button at until the head restraints are placed in their an authorized dealer immediately. proper positions in order to minimize the risk the base of each post while pulling the head of neck injury in the event of a crash. restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39

the head restraint posts into the holes while NOTE: pushing the adjustment button and release WARNING! (Continued) The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is button. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.  Do not place items over the top of the Reac- disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to tive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat improve the driver’s rear view. NOTE: covers or portable DVD players. These It may be necessary to recline the front seat The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned items may interfere with the operation of 2 before removing the head restraint to provide the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of on or off through the touchscreen. enough clearance from the roof. a collision and could result in serious injury or death. WARNING!  A loose head restraint thrown forward in a Rear Head Restraints collision or hard stop could cause serious The rear outboard head restraints are injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. non-adjustable and are designed to reduce the Always securely stow removed head risk of injury by restricting head movement in restraints in a location outside the occu- the event of a rear impact. pant compartment.

 ALL the head restraints MUST be rein- MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR CAUTION! instructions above prior to operating the Automatic Dimming Mirror vehicle or occupying a seat. To avoid damage to the mirror during The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, (Continued) cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution center on the view through the rear window. onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40

40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS 3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window. OUTSIDE MIRRORS To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down 4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the one of the visors and lift the cover. blockage. center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view. NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther Illuminated Vanity Mirror Slide-On-Rod Extender away than they really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender To use the extender feature of the sun visor, collide with another vehicle or other object. Feature grab the extender which is located at the rear of Use your inside mirror when judging the size the visor and pull rearward. The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor mirror. to block out the sun. 1. Fold down the sun visor. 2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41

POWER MIRRORS NOTE:  HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held A light in the select button will illuminate indi- transmitters that operate devices such as The power mirror switch is located on the cating the mirror is activated and can be garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting driver's side door trim panel. adjusted. or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit The power mirror controls consist of mirror is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery. select buttons and a four-way mirror control HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED 2  The HomeLink® buttons that are located in switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select These mirrors are heated to melt frost the overhead console or sunvisor designate button for the mirror that you want to adjust. or ice. This feature will be activated the three different HomeLink® channels. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of whenever you turn on the rear window the four arrows for the direction that you want defroster (if equipped) Ú page 53.  To operate HomeLink®, push and release the mirror to move. any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER These buttons will activate the devices they are programmed to with each press of the (HOMELINK®) corresponding HomeLink® button.  The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the center button Ú page 348. BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® For efficient programming and accurate Power Mirror Control transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new battery be placed in 1 — Mirror Adjustment the hand-held transmitter of the device that is 2 — Left Mirror Selection HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light being programmed to the HomeLink® system. 3 — Right Mirror Selection Make sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to activate the device you are trying to program your HomeLink® button to. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42

42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A Non-Rolling Code Devices garage before you begin programming. ROLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE Most devices manufactured before 1995 will It is recommended that you erase all the DEVICE not have a rolling code. These devices will also channels of your HomeLink® before you use it not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. for the first time. Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink® buttons, you must determine PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A If you require assistance, please call whether the device has a rolling code or GARAGE DOOR OPENER toll-free1-800-355-3515 or visit HomeLink.com non-rolling code. To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® Rolling Code Devices activate your garage door opener motor, follow CHANNELS To determine if your device has a rolling code, a the steps below: To erase the channels, follow this procedure: good indicator is its manufacturing date. NOTE: Typically, devices manufactured after 1995 All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code position. this procedure. You do not need to erase all will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button channels when programming additional 2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® located where the antenna is attached to the buttons. buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or device. The button may not be immediately until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes. visible when looking at the device. The name 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN and color of the button may vary slightly by position. NOTE: manufacturer. 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 Erasing all channels should only be performed NOTE: to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the when programming HomeLink® for the first The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button HomeLink® button you wish to program, time. Do not erase channels when programming you normally use to operate the device. while keeping the HomeLink® indicator additional buttons. light in view. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43

3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you the garage door opener motor. Firmly push want to program while you push and hold and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” WARNING! the garage door opener transmitter button button.  Your motorized door or gate will open and you are trying to replicate. close while you are programming the 2. Return to the vehicle and push the universal transceiver. Do not program the 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe programmed HomeLink® button three transceiver if people or pets are in the path 2 the HomeLink® indicator light. The times (holding the button for two seconds of the door or gate. HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly each time). If the garage door opener motor and then rapidly. Once this happens, operates, programming is complete.  Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage release both buttons. or confined area while programming the 3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle NOTE: to confirm that the garage door opener contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is Make sure the garage door opener motor is motor operates. If the garage door opener odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/ motor does not operate, repeat the final poisonous when inhaled and can cause you non-rolling code final steps. steps for the rolling code procedure. and others to be severely injured or killed. Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A NOTE: MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling 1. Push and hold the programmed code final step 2, after completing rolling code HomeLink® button and observe the Follow the procedure on programming final step 1. HomeLink® indicator light. If the HomeLink® to a garage door opener HomeLink® indicator light stays on Ú page 42. Be sure to determine if the device 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the constantly, programming is complete. has a rolling code, or non-rolling code before garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” beginning the programming process. button. This can usually be found where 2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button the hanging antenna wire is attached to to confirm that the garage door opener NOTE: motor operates. If the garage door opener Canadian radio frequency laws require trans- motor does not operate, repeat the steps mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several from the beginning. seconds of transmission, which may not be long 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44

44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® during programming. Similar to this Canadian PROGRAMMING button, while you press and release (cycle) law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to your hand-held transmitter every two time-out in the same manner. The procedure For programming transmitters in Canada/ seconds until HomeLink® has successfully may need to be performed multiple times to United States that require the transmitter accepted the frequency signal. The successfully pair the device to your HomeLink® signals to “time-out” after several seconds of indicator light will flash slowly and then buttons. transmission. rapidly when fully trained. Canadian radio frequency laws require REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after HOMELINK® BUTTON change flash rates. When it changes, it is several seconds of transmission – which may programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up or longer in rare cases. The garage door has been previously trained, without erasing all the signal during programming. Similar to this may open and close while you are the channels, follow the procedure below. Be Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are programming. sure to determine whether the new device you designed to time-out in the same manner. 5. Press and hold the programmed want to program the HomeLink® button to has It may be helpful to unplug the device during the HomeLink® button and observe the a rolling code or non-rolling code. cycling process to prevent possible overheating indicator light. 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, of the garage door or gate motor. NOTE: without starting the engine. 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.  If the indicator light stays on constantly, 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to programming is complete and the garage button until the HomeLink® Indicator light 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the door/device should activate when the begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not HomeLink® button you wish to program HomeLink® button is pressed. release the button. while keeping the HomeLink® indicator  3. Without releasing the button, proceed with light in view. To program the two remaining Home- Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A Link® buttons, repeat each step for each Garage Door Opener” and follow all remaining button. DO NOT erase the remaining steps. channels. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45 If you unplugged the garage door opener/ EXTERIOR LIGHTS device for programming, plug it back in at this time. HEADLIGHT SWITCH Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button The headlight switch is located on the left side (Canadian/Gate Operator) of the instrument panel. This switch controls the 2 To reprogram a channel that has been operation of the headlights, parking lights, previously trained, follow these steps: instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights (if 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. equipped). Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to 1 — Rotate Headlight Control flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the 2 — Push Fog Light Control button. 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with 4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all remaining steps. NOTE: Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight switch without the OFF position. In Headlight Switch order to turn the exterior lights off, the headlight switch must be rotated to AUTO position. 1 — Rotate Headlight Control 2 — Push Fog Light Control To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate 4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control light and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46

46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the head- IF EQUIPPED light switch clockwise from the parking light and Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel light position to the first The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when instrument panel to switch the headlights to detent to turn the headlight switch to the AUTO the engine is started and will remain on unless high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever position. Rotate to the second detent to turn on the headlamps are turned to the on position, back will turn the low beams on. headlight, parking light, and instrument panel the parking brake is applied, or the ignition is AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP placed in the OFF position. light operation. CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: MULTIFUNCTION LEVER The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control The multifunction lever is located on the left  For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime system provides increased forward lighting at side of the steering column. Running Lights will automatically deactivate night by automating high beam control through when the front fog lights are turned on. the use of a camera mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle  If allowed by law in the country in which the specific light and automatically switches from vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running high beams to low beams until the approaching Lights can be turned on and off using the vehicle is out of view. Uconnect system Ú page 133. NOTE:  On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on  The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is can be turned on or off using the Uconnect activated on that side), or on both sides of system Ú page 133. the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights Multifunction Lever  are activated). Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47

 To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS NOTE: Sensitivity Control and enter Reduced For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the head- High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not recom- This system automatically turns the headlights light switch to the AUTO position to turn off the mended), toggle the high beam lever six full on or off according to ambient light levels. To parking lights. on/off cycles within 10 seconds of placing turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch the ignition in the ON position. The system counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS 2 the system is on, the headlight time delay will return to the default setting upon placing If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic feature is also on. the ignition in the OFF position. Headlights, it also has this  If the windshield or Automatic High Beam When the system is on, the Headlight Delay customer-programmable feature. When your Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the feature is also on. This means the headlights headlights are in the automatic mode and the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place engine is running, they will automatically turn performance. See a local authorized dealer. the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the on when the wiper system is on. This feature is automatic headlights off, turn the headlight programmable through the Uconnect system FLASH-TO-PASS switch out of the AUTO position. Ú page 133. You can signal another vehicle with your NOTE: In addition, the headlights will turn off when the headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction The engine must be running before the head- wipers are turned off if they were turned on by lever toward you. This will cause the high beam lights will come on in the automatic mode. this feature. headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released. PARKING LIGHTS NOTE: To turn on the parking lights and instrument If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to panel lights, rotate the headlight switch pass position for more than 20 seconds, the clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate high beams will shut off. the headlight switch back to the O (off) position. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48

48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight To activate the front fog lights, turn on the on low beam. An indicator light located in the delay feature will leave the headlights on for up parking lights or the low beam headlights, and instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the push the fog light button on the headlight lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the ignition is placed in the OFF position while the switch. switch is pushed a second time, when the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or switch is cycled off within 45 seconds. the high beam is selected. Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by TURN SIGNALS placing the ignition in the ON position. Move the multifunction lever up or down to NOTE: activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show  This feature can be programmed through the proper operation. Uconnect system Ú page 133. NOTE:  If you turn the headlights off before the igni- Fog Light Switch tion, they will turn off in the normal manner.  If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a LIGHTS-ON REMINDER defective outside light bulb. If the headlights or parking lights are on after  A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the instrument cluster display and a continuous vehicle will chime when the driver's door is chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more opened. than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49

LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED FRONT MAP/READING LIGHTS AMBIENT LIGHT — IF EQUIPPED Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, These lights are mounted between the sun The overhead console is equipped with an without moving beyond the detent, and the turn visors on the overhead console. Each light is ambient light feature. This light casts signal will flash three times then automatically turned on by pushing the lens. Push the lens a illumination for improved visibility of the floor turn off. second time to turn off the light. These lights and center console area. 2 also turn on when a door is opened, when the Rotate the right dimmer control upward or INTERIOR LIGHTS unlock button on the remote keyless entry key downward to increase or decrease the fob is pushed, or when the dimmer control is The interior lights come on when a door is brightness of the door handle lights, map turned fully upward, to the second detent. opened. pocket lights, and ambient light located in the overhead console. To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. The Battery Protection also includes the glove compartment light and the trunk light. To restore interior light operation after automatic battery protection is enabled (lights off), either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch. Map/Reading Lights Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50

50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position. Interior Light Defeat (Off) Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme bottom (O) off position. The interior Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer Instrument Panel Dimmer lights will remain off when the doors are open. (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) DIMMER CONTROLS Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature The dimmer control is part of the headlight brightens all text displays such as the switch and is located on the left side of the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio instrument panel. when the parking lights or headlights are on. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if equipped). Instrument Panel Dimmer (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Washers To use the washer, push the multifunction lever The windshield wiper/washer controls are inward (toward the steering wheel) and hold. If located on the multifunction lever on the left the lever is pushed while in the intermittent side of the steering column. The multifunction setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for lever operates the windshield wipers and 2 two cycles after the end of the lever is released, washer when the ignition is placed in the ACC or and then resume the intermittent interval ON/RUN position. previously selected. If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers Windshield Wiper Operation are in the off position, the wipers will operate for Intermittent Wipers three wipe cycles and then turn off. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the WARNING! first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. Sudden loss of visibility through the There are four delay settings, which allow you to windshield could lead to a collision. You might regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To one cycle every second to a maximum of avoid sudden icing of the windshield during Windshield Wiper/Washer Control approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. washer use. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52

52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Mist The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted CAUTION! (Continued) Rotate the end of the lever downward to the with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay MIST position and release for a single wiping  In cold weather, always turn off the wiper position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay cycle. The wipers will continue to operate until switch and allow the wipers to return to the position 4 is the most sensitive. you release the multifunction lever park position before turning off the engine. Wiper delay position three should be used for If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers normal rain conditions. NOTE: freeze to the windshield, damage to the The Mist feature does not activate the washer wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is NOTE: pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed restarted.  The Rain Sensing feature will not operate on the windshield. The wash function must be  Always remove any buildup of snow that when the wiper switch is in the low or used in order to spray the windshield with prevents the windshield wiper blades from high-speed position. washer fluid. returning to the off position. If the wind-  The Rain Sensing feature may not function For information on wiper care and replacement, shield wiper control is turned off and the properly when ice, or dried salt water is see Ú page 290. blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. present on the windshield. CAUTION!  Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or AIN ENSING IPERS F QUIPPED silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-  Turn the windshield wipers off when driving R S W — I E mance. through an automatic car wash. Damage to This feature senses rain or snowfall on the the windshield wipers may result if the windshield and automatically activates the  The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on wiper control is left in any position other wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction and off using the Uconnect system than off. lever to one of four settings to activate this Ú page 133. (Continued) feature. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53 The Rain Sensing system has protection CLIMATE CONTROLS features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions: The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction  Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni- of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain controls are located on the touchscreen (if 2 Sensing system will not operate until the equipped) and on the instrument panel below wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is the radio. greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C). AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL  Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in Automatic Climate Controls the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing MAX A/C Button system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than Press and release the MAX A/C button 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is on the touchscreen to change the moved out of the NEUTRAL position. current setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator  Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing and equipped with Remote Start system, Rain releasing the button again will cause the MAX Sensing wipers are not operational when the A/C operation to exit. vehicle is in the remote start mode. Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate NOTE: Controls The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54

54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

A/C Button Recirculation Button AUTO Button Press and release this button on the Press and release this button on the Set your desired temperature and press touchscreen, or push the button on touchscreen, or push the button on AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain the faceplate to change the current the faceplate to change the system your desired temperature by setting. The A/C indicator illuminates between recirculation mode and automatically adjusting the blower speed when A/C is ON. outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the and the A/C indicator illuminate when the recommended for efficiency. You can press and operator to manually activate or deactivate the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation release this button on the touchscreen, or push the air conditioning system. When the air can be used when outside conditions such as button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO conditioning system is turned on, cool smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling this dehumidified air will flow through the outlets present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. function will cause the system to switch between Ú into the cabin. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the manual mode and automatic modes page 56. touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that Front Defrost Button NOTE: could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected Press and release the Front Defrost  If fog or mist appears on the windshield or manually without disturbing the mode control button on the touchscreen, or push side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation and release the button on the blower speed if needed. mode may make the inside air stuffy and faceplate, to change the current airflow  If your air conditioning performance seems window fogging may occur. Extended use of this setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost lower than expected, check the front of the mode is not recommended. indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window A/C condenser (located in front of the radi- In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. demist outlets. When the defrost button is lead to excessive window fogging. The Clean with a gentle water spray from the front selected, the blower level may increase. Use Recirculation feature may be unavailable if of the radiator and through the condenser. Defrost mode with maximum temperature conditions exist that could create fogging on the settings for best windshield and side window inside of the windshield. defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55

Rear Defrost Button Driver And Passenger Up And Down NOTE: Press and release the Rear Defrost Buttons The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen. button on the touchscreen, or push These buttons provide the driver and passenger and release the button on the with independent temperature control. Blower Control faceplate, to turn on the rear window Push the red button on the faceplate Blower Control is used to regulate the 2 defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if or touchscreen or press and slide the amount of air forced through the equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator temperature bar towards the red Climate Control system. There are illuminates when the rear window defroster is arrow button on the touchscreen for seven blower speeds available. on. The rear window defroster automatically warmer temperature settings. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode turns off after 10 minutes. Push the blue button on the faceplate to switch to manual operation. The speeds can CAUTION! or touchscreen or press and slide the be selected using either the blower control knob temperature bar towards the blue on the faceplate or the buttons on the Failure to follow these cautions can cause arrow on the touchscreen for cooler touchscreen. damage to the heating elements: temperature settings. Faceplate  Use care when washing the inside of the SYNC Button The blower speed increases as you turn the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the Press the SYNC button on the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest window. Use a soft cloth and a mild touchscreen to toggle the Sync blower setting. The blower speed decreases as washing solution, wiping parallel to the feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is you turn the blower control knob heating elements. Labels can be peeled off illuminated when SYNC is on. SYNC is counterclockwise. after soaking with warm water. used to synchronize the passenger temperature Touchscreen setting with the driver temperature setting.  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower Changing the passenger temperature setting abrasive window cleaners on the interior setting and the large blower icon to increase the while in SYNC will automatically exit this surface of the window. blower setting. Blower can also be selected by feature.  Keep all objects a safe distance from the pressing the blower bar area between the icons. window. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56

56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Mode Control NOTE: AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL Select Mode by pressing one of the Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi- (ATC) Mode buttons on the touchscreen to tions to provide cooler air out of the panel Automatic Operation change the airflow distribution mode. outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. The airflow distribution mode can be Floor Mode 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or adjusted so air comes from the instrument the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Air comes from the floor outlets. A panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) slight amount of air is directed demist outlets. Panel. through the defrost and side window Panel Mode demister outlets. 2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would Air comes from the outlets in the Mix Mode like the system to maintain by adjusting the instrument panel. Each of these driver and passenger temperature control Air is directed through the floor, outlets can be individually adjusted to buttons. Once the desired temperature is defrost, and side window demister direct the flow of air. The air vanes of displayed, the system will achieve and outlets. This setting works best in cold the center outlets and outboard outlets can be automatically maintain that comfort level. or snowy conditions that require extra moved up and down or side to side to regulate heat to the windshield. This setting is good for 3. When the system is set up for your comfort airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on level, it is not necessary to change the located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the windshield. settings. You will experience the greatest the amount of airflow from these outlets. efficiency by simply allowing the system to Climate Control OFF Button Bi-Level Mode function automatically. Press and release this button to turn Air comes from the instrument panel the Climate Control ON/OFF. outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57

NOTE: Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of Winter Operation the following commands:  It is not necessary to move the temperature To ensure the best possible heater and settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system  “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees” defroster performance, make sure the engine automatically adjusts the temperature, cooling system is functioning properly and the  “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees” mode, and blower speed to provide comfort proper amount, type, and concentration of 2 as quickly as possible. TIP: coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation Voice Command for Climate may only be used mode during Winter months is not  The temperature can be displayed in US or to adjust the interior temperature of your recommended, because it may cause window Metric units within Uconnect Settings vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust fogging. Ú page 133. the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped. Vacation/Storage To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the OPERATING TIPS For information on maintaining the Climate Control system when the vehicle is being stored blower fan will remain on low until the engine NOTE: warms up. The blower will increase in speed for an extended period of time, see Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Ú page 331. and transition into Auto mode. suggested control settings for various weather Manual Operation Override conditions. Window Fogging Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in This system offers a full complement of manual Summer Operation override features. The AUTO symbol in the front mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the The engine cooling system must be protected ATC display will be turned off when the system windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide is being used in the manual mode. increase the front blower speed. Do not use the proper corrosion protection and to protect Recirculation mode without A/C for long CLIMATE — VOICE RECOGNITION against engine overheating. OAT coolant periods, as fogging may occur. (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58

58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Outside Air Intake  Activation By Rear Defrost CONTROL WEATHER Make sure the air intake, located directly in The wiper de-icer activates automatically SETTINGS front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, when the Rear Defrost is operating and the Turn (A/C) such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C). intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the on and set the mode  Activation By Remote Start Operation air distribution box, they could plug the water Warm Weather control to the drains. In Winter months, make sure the air When the Remote Start is activated and the (Panel Mode) intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. outside ambient temperature is less than position. 33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is Cabin Air Filter Operate in activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the Cool Sunny (Bi-Level Mode) The climate control system filters out dust and climate control functions will resume their position. pollen from the air. Contact an authorized previous operation. If the de-icer is active, the dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to de-icer timer and operation will continue. Set the mode control have it replaced when needed. Operating Tips Chart Cool & Humid to (Mix Mode) and Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped Conditions turn on (A/C) to CONTROL The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating WEATHER keep windows clear. element located at the base of the windshield. SETTINGS Set the mode control Set the mode control It operates automatically once the following to the (Floor conditions are met: to (Panel Mode), Mode) position. If (MAX A/C) on, and Cold Weather windshield fogging  Activation By Front Defrost Hot Weather And blower on high. Roll starts to occur, move The wiper de-icer activates automatically Vehicle Interior Is Very down the windows for the control to the during a cold weather manual start with full Hot a minute to flush out (Mix Mode) position. defrost, and when the ambient temperature the hot air. Adjust the is below 33°F (0.6°C). controls as needed to achieve comfort. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59

Console Features INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT WARNING! The center console has a storage compartment STORAGE located underneath the armrest. The Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving Glove Compartment compartment contains a 12 Volt power outlet, and is also equipped with a USB port featuring with the console compartment lid open may The glove compartment is located on the 2 active charging, which will continue charging result in injury in a collision. passenger side of the instrument panel. your device up to 60 minutes after the ignition is turned off. The USB port also may be ILLUMINATED CUPHOLDERS — equipped with an IPOD®/USB control IF EQUIPPED Ú page 60, or Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ Ú page 177. The front cupholders are equipped with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the front passengers. The light ring is controlled by the dimmer control Ú page 50.

Glove Compartment To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.

Center Console

Light Ring In Front Cupholder 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60

60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

USB/AUX CONTROL phones, small electronics and other low NOTE: powered electrical accessories. The power The front integrated center stack power outlet Located in the front storage area of the center outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a can be changed to “battery” (powered at all console, this feature allows an external USB “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is times) by moving the integrated center stack device to be connected to the audio system. powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” can fuse #12 in the Rear Power Distribution Center Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port be powered when the ignition is in the ACC or from fuse location “IGN” to “B+” Ú page 298. may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® ON/RUN position, while the outlets labeled with features, if equipped a “battery” are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times. These power outlets can also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit. The front power outlet is located next to the storage area on the integrated center stack of the instrument panel.

Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated USB/AUX Ports Center Stack 1 — USB 1 Port 2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center 2 — AUX Jack Console 3 — USB 2 Port

POWER OUTLETS Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack Front Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets that can be used to power cellular 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61

In addition to the front center stack power outlet, there is also a power outlet located in the WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) center console to the left of the media hub. To avoid serious injury or death:  Many accessories that can be plugged in  Only devices designed for use in this type of draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). outlet should be inserted into any 2 12 Volt outlet. Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently  Do not touch with wet hands. to degrade battery life and/or prevent the  Close the lid when not in use and while engine from starting. driving the vehicle.  Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,  If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will electric shock and failure. degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with Power Outlet — Center Console greater caution. CAUTION! NOTE:  After the use of high power draw accesso- All accessories connected to these powered  Do not exceed the maximum power of ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being outlets should be removed or turned off when 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is the vehicle must be driven a sufficient against discharge. exceeded the fuse protecting the system length of time to allow the alternator to will need to be replaced. recharge the vehicle's battery.  Power outlets are designed for accessory  Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces- the power outlets as this will damage the sory or accessory bracket from the plug. outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the Improper use of the power outlet can cause power outlet can cause damage not covered damage. by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62

62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WINDOWS NOTE: Automatic Window Features The power window switches will remain active The driver and, in some models, passenger power POWER WINDOW CONTROLS for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push in the OFF position. Opening either front door The window switches on the driver's door the window switch to the second detent, release, will cancel this feature. The timing is program- control all the door windows. and the window will go down automatically. mable within Uconnect Settings Ú page 133. To open the window part way, push the window WARNING! switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, To stop the window from going all the way down and do not let children play with power during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near switch briefly. the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a WIND BUFFETING vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in Wind buffeting can be described as the the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, perception of pressure on the ears or a Power Window Switches particularly unattended children, can become helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle entrapped by the windows while operating the may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows The passenger door window can also be power window switches. Such entrapment may down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain operated by using the single window controls on result in serious injury or death. the passenger door trim panel. The window open or partially open positions. This is a normal controls will operate only when the ignition is in occurrence and can be minimized. If the the ACC or ON/RUN position. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63

buffeting occurs with the windows open, OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF partially close the windows to minimize the WARNING! buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the  Never leave children unattended in a Express Open/Close sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to vehicle, or with access to an unlocked Push the switch rearward and release it within minimize the buffeting or open any window. vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near one-half second, the sunroof and sunshade will the vehicle, or in a location accessible to open automatically and stop at full open 2 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED children. Do not leave the ignition of a position. vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go Push the switch forward and release it within The power sunroof switch is located between in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, one-half second and the sunroof will close the sun visors on the overhead console. particularly unattended children, can automatically from any position. become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. During Express Open or Express Close Such entrapment may result in serious operation, any other movement of the sunroof injury or death. switch will stop the sunroof.  In a collision, there is a greater risk of being Manual Open/Close thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. Push and hold the switch rearward, the sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed. and sunshade will open and automatically stop Always fasten your seat belt properly and at full open position. make sure all passengers are also properly secured. Push and hold the switch forward and the Power Sunroof Switch sunroof will close from any position and stop at  Do not allow small children to operate the a full closed position. sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through Any release of the switch during open or close the sunroof opening. Injury may result. operation will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in a partially opened position until the switch is operated and held again. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64

64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

PINCH PROTECT FEATURE NOTE: 1. Pull the release lever located underneath The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the driver’s side of the instrument panel. This feature will detect an obstruction in the open. closing of the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the SUNROOF MAINTENANCE sunroof is detected, the sunroof will Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for this occurs. and clear out any debris that may have NOTE: collected in the tracks. If three consecutive sunroof close attempts IGNITION OFF OPERATION result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in NOTE: Manual Mode. Hood Release Lever  The power sunroof switch can remain active VENTING SUNROOF in Accessory Delay for up to approximately 2. Reach under the hood, push the safety 10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is catch to the left and lift the hood. Push and release the Vent switch within one placed to the OFF position. Opening either half second and the sunroof will open to the front door will cancel this feature. vent position. During Express Vent operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switches will  This feature is programmable using the stop the sunroof operation. Uconnect system Ú page 133. SUNSHADE OPERATION HOOD The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically OPENING THE HOOD as the sunroof opens. To open the hood, two latches must be released. Hood Safety Catch Location 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65

CLOSING THE HOOD  Trunk passive entry button Ú page 24 Key Fob Trunk Release Button  External release switch located on the under- Push the power trunk button on the WARNING! side of the decklid overhang key fob twice within five seconds to Be sure the hood is fully latched before release the trunk. NOTE: driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully The release feature will function only when the Passive Entry Button 2 latched, it could open when the vehicle is in vehicle is unlocked. Push the trunk passive entry button which is motion and block your vision. Failure to follow located on the back of the trunk lid. With a valid this warning could result in serious injury or With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the death. trunk open symbol will display in the instrument trunk, push the passive entry button to open the cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The trunk. odometer display will reappear once the trunk is CAUTION! closed. To prevent possible damage, do not slam the With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately open symbol will display until the trunk is 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to closed. close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both Power Trunk Release Button latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. The trunk can be opened from inside the vehicle using the power trunk release button located on the TRUNK instrument panel to the left of the Trunk Passive Entry Button OPENING THE TRUNK steering wheel. The trunk may be opened in several ways: NOTE: The automatic transmission must be in PARK  Power trunk release button on the instru- before the button will operate. For manual ment panel transmissions, the vehicle must be in NEUTRAL.  Trunk button on the key fob 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66

66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CLOSING THE TRUNK TRUNK SAFETY WARNING! With one or more hands placed on the outside Trunk Emergency Release Do not allow children to have access to the trunk surface push the trunk lid down until you As a security measure, a trunk internal trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from hear the trunk lock latch into place. emergency release lever is built into the trunk outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. NOTE: latching mechanism. In the event of an Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is Before closing the trunk lid, make sure your key individual being locked inside the trunk, the unattended. Once in the trunk, young children fob is not inside the trunk area. The trunk will trunk can be opened by actuating the may not be able to escape, even if they latch then automatically unlock if the key fob is glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk entered through the rear seat. If trapped in sensed, not allowing the key fob to be locked in latching mechanism. the trunk, children can die from suffocation the trunk area. or heat stroke.

Trunk Emergency Release 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67

67 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Instrument Cluster For 3.6L or 5.7L Engine 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68

68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4. Temperature Gauge INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS CAUTION!  The temperature gauge shows engine 1. Tachometer coolant temperature. Any reading within Driving with a hot engine cooling system  Indicates the engine speed in revolutions the normal range indicates that the could damage your vehicle. If the per minute (RPM x 1000). engine cooling system is operating satis- temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air 2. Instrument Cluster Display factorily. conditioner turned off until the pointer drops  When the appropriate conditions exist,  The gauge pointer will likely indicate a back into the normal range. If the pointer this display shows the instrument cluster higher temperature when driving in hot remains on the “H,” turn the engine off display messages Ú page 69. weather, up mountain grades, or when immediately and call an authorized dealer for towing a trailer. It should not be allowed service. to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. 5. Fuel Gauge WARNING!  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. Ignition is in the ON/RUN position. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call  The fuel pump symbol points an authorized dealer for service if your to the side of the vehicle where vehicle overheats Ú page 292. the fuel door is located. Instrument Cluster Display NOTE: 3. Speedometer The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check  Indicates vehicle speed. when the ignition is first cycled. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument mounted on the steering wheel: cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument 3 cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display Instrument Cluster Display located on the instrument panel, your This system conveniently allows the driver to instrument cluster display can show you how select a variety of useful information by pushing systems are working and give you warnings the arrow buttons located on the left side of the Instrument Cluster Display Controls when they are not. The steering wheel mounted steering wheel. The instrument cluster display controls allow you to scroll through the main menu items consist of the following: Up And Down Arrow Buttons: menus and submenus. You can access the  Using the up or down arrow button allows specific information you want and make Speedometer you to cycle through the Main Menu Items. selections and adjustments.  Vehicle Info Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title LOCATION AND CONTROLS  Driver Assist — If Equipped area. The instrument cluster display features an  Fuel Economy Left And Right Arrow Buttons: interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster.  Trip Using the left or right arrow button allows you to cycle through the submenu items of the  Audio Main menu item.  Messages  Screen Setup 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70

70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:  Pushing the left arrow button will exit each Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — submenu layer and return to the main menu. Ignition  Holding the up or down or left or Use the steering wheel instrument cluster right arrow button will loop the user For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and display controls for the following procedure(s): through the currently selected menu or Performance Timers) — If Equipped: options presented on the screen.  Information is reset by pushing and holding 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the  Upon returning to a main menu, the last the OK button. ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not submenu screen viewed within that main ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET start the engine). menu will be displayed. Oil Change Required OK Button: 2. Push and release the down arrow button Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil to scroll downward through the main menu For Digital Speedometer: change indicator system. The “Oil Change to “Vehicle Info.”  Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or Required” message will display in the km/h). instrument cluster display for five seconds after 3. Push and release the right arrow button a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next to access the ”Oil Life” screen. For Screen Setup: scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil 4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life.  OK button allows user to enter menu and change indicator system is duty cycle based, If conditions are met, the gauge and submenus. which means the engine oil change interval may numeric display will update to show 100%. fluctuate, dependent upon your personal If conditions are not met a pop-up message  Within each submenu layer, the up and driving style. of "To reset oil life engine must be off with down arrow buttons will allow the user to Unless reset, this message will continue to select the item of interest. ignition in run” will be displayed (for five display each time you place the ignition in the seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil  Pushing the OK button makes the selection ON/RUN position. To turn off the message Life screen. and a confirmation screen will appear temporarily, push and release the OK or arrow (returning the user to the first page of the buttons. To reset the oil change indicator 5. Push and release the up or down submenu). system (after performing the scheduled arrow button to return to previous main maintenance), refer to the following procedure. menu. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71

NOTE: provides the driver with a visual indication release the right or left arrow button to If the indicator message illuminates when you within the instrument cluster display when the scroll through the submenus items of “Vehicle start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system driver configured gear shift point has been Info.” Follow the directional prompts to access did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. reached and the driver is still accelerating. This or reset any of the following “Vehicle Info” indication notifies the driver to change gear Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life submenu items: corresponding to the configured RPMs in the Tire Pressure Monitor 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the head unit. If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON 3 ENGINE START/STOP button and place the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not is displayed with tire pressure values in each start the engine). SELECTABLE MENU ITEMS corner of the ICON. 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, Push and release the up or down arrow If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate three times within ten seconds. button until the desired Selectable Menu item is Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON displayed in the instrument cluster display. and the tire pressure values in each corner of 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as ENGINE START/STOP button once to return are displayed in a different color than the other desired. the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position. tire pressure value. Speedometer NOTE: If the Tire Pressure system requires service, If the indicator message illuminates when you Push and release the up or down arrow “Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed. start the vehicle, the oil change indicator button until the speedometer menu is displayed Tire PSI is an information only function and system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this in the instrument cluster display. Push and cannot be reset Ú page 210. procedure. release the OK button to toggle units (km/h or mph) of the speedometer. Coolant Temp PERFORMANCE SHIFT INDICATOR (PSI) Vehicle Info  Displays the actual coolant temperature. — IF EQUIPPED Push and release the up or down arrow Trans Temp The PSI is enabled on vehicles with manual button until the “Vehicle Info” menu is displayed  Displays the actual transmission tempera- transmission, or when a vehicle with automatic in the instrument cluster display. Push and ture. transmission is in manual shift mode. The PSI 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72

72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Oil Temp All Wheel Drive (AWD) Status — If Equipped ACC SET  Displays the actual oil temperature.  Displays the status of the All - Wheel Drive When ACC is set, the set speed will display in system. the instrument cluster. Oil Pressure If the Driver Assist main menu is not selected,  Displays the actual oil pressure. Driver Assist — If Equipped an ACC pop - up message may display if any ACC Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu Oil Life activity occurs, which may include any of the The instrument cluster display displays the following: To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK current ACC system settings. The information button. The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will  Distance Setting Change displayed depends on ACC system status. be displayed at all times, but the following  System Cancel conditions will need to be met in order to reset Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the Oil Life: steering wheel) until one of the following  Driver Override displays in the instrument cluster display:  The vehicle must be off  System Off Adaptive Cruise Control Off  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position  ACC Proximity Warning When ACC is deactivated, the display will read If the conditions are met, holding the OK button “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”  ACC Unavailable Warning will reset the gauge and the numeric display will Adaptive Cruise Control Ready return to 100%. The instrument cluster display will return to the When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed last display selected after five seconds of no If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message setting has not been selected, the display will ACC display activity Ú page 106. will display for 5 seconds, describing the read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” required conditions, and then the Oil Life screen will reappear. Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display Battery Voltage in the instrument cluster display:  Displays the actual battery voltage. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73

Fuel Economy Trip B. The Trip information will display the Screen Setup following: Two submenu pages; one with Current Value Push and release the up or down arrow (instantaneous calculation of the fuel economy)  Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in displayed and one without the Current Value km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last the instrument cluster display. Push and displayed (toggle the left or right arrow reset. release the OK button to enter the submenus. button to select one):  Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average The Screen Setup feature allows you to change  Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or fuel economy (MPG, L/100km or km/L) of what information is displayed in the instrument 3 km/L). Trip A or Trip B since the last reset. cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.  Range To Empty (miles or km).  Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. 1. Upper Left  Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or  Compass km/L). Hold the OK button to reset feature information.  Outside Temp  The Max and Min values will correspond to Audio  the particular engine requirements. This menu displays the Audio information of the Time  Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an currently playing audio source (e.g. FM radio).  Range to Empty amber color and turn green as Fuel Economy Messages  Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) improves. This feature shows the number of stored  Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)  Hold the OK button to reset average fuel warning messages, if any. Pushing the right  Trip A Distance economy information. or left arrow button will allow you to scroll  Trip B Distance Trip Info through the stored messages.  None Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip A or 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74

74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. Upper Right  Trip A Distance BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER  Compass  Trip B Distance MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD  Outside Temp  Audio Information REDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED  Time  Digital Speed This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional  Range to Empty  None monitoring of the electrical system and status  Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) 4. Current Gear of the vehicle battery.  Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)  On In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are  Trip A Distance  Off deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time and distance  Trip B Distance 5. Odometer of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or  None  Show turning off non-essential electrical loads. 3. Center  Hide Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It will display a message if there is a  Menu Title 6. Gear Display risk of battery depletion to the point where the  Compass  Full vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,  Outside Temp  Single or will not restart after the current drive cycle. When load reduction is activated, the message  Time 7. Restore Defaults “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will  Range to Empty  Ok appear in the instrument cluster.  Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)  Cancel These messages indicate the vehicle battery  Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75

NOTE: Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or  The battery was discharged by an electrical more of the following conditions: load left on when the vehicle was parked.  The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system  The charging system cannot deliver enough  The battery was used for an extended period performs a diagnostic on the charging electrical power to the vehicle system with the engine not running to supply radio, system continuously. because the electrical loads are larger than lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appli- the capability of the charging system. The ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles  If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it charging system is still functioning properly. and similar devices. may indicate a problem with the charging 3 system Ú page 77.  Turning on all possible vehicle electrical What to do when an electrical load reduction loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and action message is present (“Battery Saver On” The electrical loads that may be switched off interior lights, overloaded power outlets or “Battery Saver Mode”) (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports) during be affected by load reduction: certain driving conditions (city driving, During a trip:  Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel towing, frequent stopping).  Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:  Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped  Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio  Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)  Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors systems, alarms and similar devices.  Check what may be plugged in to power  HVAC System  Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB  115 Volts AC Power Inverter System by long parking periods). ports   Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)  Audio and Telematics System The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time (weeks, months).  Check the audio settings (volume)  The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76

76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

After a trip: The system check menu may appear different If the light remains on when the parking brake  Check if any aftermarket equipment was based upon equipment options and current has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it accessories, audio systems, alarms) and may not appear. indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake review specifications if any (load and Ignition RED WARNING LIGHTS Off Draw currents). Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Air Bag Warning Light Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability  Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, This warning light will illuminate to Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will driving time and parking time). indicate a fault with the air bag, and remain on until the condition has been  The vehicle should have service performed if will turn on for four to eight seconds as corrected. If the problem is related to the brake the message is still present during consecu- a bulb check when the ignition is booster, the ABS pump will run when applying tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be and driving pattern did not help to identify the This light will illuminate with a single chime when felt during each stop. cause. a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will The dual brake system provides a reserve stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is braking capacity in the event of a failure to a WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in while driving, have the system inspected at an half of the dual brake system is indicated by the the instrument panel together with a dedicated authorized dealer as soon as possible. Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when message and/or acoustic signal when Brake Warning Light the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has applicable. These indications are indicative and dropped below a specified level. This warning light monitors various precautionary and as such must not be brake functions, including brake fluid The light will remain on until the cause is considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to level and parking brake application. If corrected. the information contained in the Owner’s the brake light turns on it may indicate Manual, which you are advised to read carefully that the parking brake is applied, that the brake in all cases. Always refer to the information in fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with this chapter in the event of a failure indication. the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir. All active telltales will display first if applicable. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77

NOTE: the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is it stays on while the engine is running, there The light may flash momentarily during sharp detected. If the light does not illuminate, have may be a malfunction with the charging system. cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level the light inspected by an authorized dealer. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as conditions. The vehicle should have service The light also will turn on when the parking possible. performed, and the brake fluid level checked. brake is applied with the ignition switch in the This indicates a possible problem with the If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is ON/RUN position. electrical system or a related component. necessary. NOTE: Door Open Warning Light 3 This light shows only that the parking brake is WARNING! This indicator will illuminate when a applied. It does not show the degree of brake door is ajar/open and not fully closed. Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is application. dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light NOTE: vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the This warning light indicates when the If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a vehicle checked immediately. driver or passenger seat belt is single chime. unbuckled. When the ignition is first Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is This warning light will turn on when Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will there's a fault with the EPS system an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn turn on. When driving, if the driver or front Ú page 103. on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the the ABS system is required. Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound WARNING! Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be Ú page 214. Continued operation with reduced assist checked by turning the ignition switch from the could pose a safety risk to yourself and OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light Battery Charge Warning Light others. Service should be obtained as soon should illuminate for approximately two This warning light will illuminate when as possible. seconds. The light should then turn off unless the battery is not charging properly. If 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78

78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning during starting, have the system checked by an Oil Pressure Warning Light Light authorized dealer. This warning light will illuminate to This warning light will illuminate to Engine Coolant Temperature Warning indicate low engine oil pressure. If the indicate a problem with the Electronic Light light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a This warning light warns of an possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A problem is detected while the vehicle overheated engine condition. If the chime will sound when this light turns on. is running, the light will either stay on or flash engine coolant temperature is too depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle high, this indicator will illuminate and Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is the ignition when the vehicle is safely and a single chime will sound. If the temperature corrected. This light does not indicate how completely stopped and the transmission is reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level placed in the PARK position. The light should sound for four minutes or until the engine is must be checked under the hood. turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle able to cool, whichever comes first. running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; Oil Temperature Warning Light however, see an authorized dealer for service If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over This warning light will illuminate to as soon as possible. and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/ indicate the engine oil temperature is C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the high. If the light turns on while driving, NOTE: transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. stop the vehicle and shut off the This light may turn on if the accelerator and If the temperature reading does not return to engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil brake pedals are pressed at the same time. normal, turn the engine off immediately and call temperature to return to normal levels. for service Ú page 269. If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is Transmission Temperature Warning Light running, immediate service is required and you Trunk Open Warning Light — If Equipped may experience reduced performance, an This indicator will illuminate when the This warning light will illuminate to elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your trunk is open and not fully closed. vehicle may require towing. The light will come warn of a high transmission fluid on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or temperature. This may occur with ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as NOTE: strenuous usage such as trailer a bulb check. If the light does not come on If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and single chime. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79

run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until Warning Light — If Equipped the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning This warning light will indicate when may continue to drive normally. Light — If Equipped the ESC system is Active. The ESC This light will turn on when a ACC is Indicator Light in the instrument WARNING! not operating and needs service cluster will come on when the ignition Ú If you continue operating the vehicle when page 106. is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN 3 the Transmission Temperature Warning Light Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning position, and when ESC is activated. It should go is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil Light out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator over, come in contact with hot engine or Light comes on continuously with the engine This warning light monitors the ABS. exhaust components and cause a fire. running, a malfunction has been detected in the The light will turn on when the ignition ESC system. If this warning light remains on after is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been RUN position and may stay on for as CAUTION! driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds long as four seconds. Continuous driving with the Transmission greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an Temperature Warning Light illuminated will If the ABS light remains on or turns on while authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the eventually cause severe transmission driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake problem diagnosed and corrected. system is not functioning and service is damage or transmission failure.  The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi- required as soon as possible. However, the cator Light come on momentarily each time conventional brake system will continue to the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ Vehicle Security Warning Light — operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning ON/RUN position. If Equipped Light is not also on.  This light will flash at a fast rate for If the ABS light does not turn on when the The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. vehicle security system is arming, RUN position, have the brake system inspected and then will flash slowly until the by an authorized dealer.  This light will come on when the vehicle is in vehicle is disarmed. an ESC event. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80

80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator WARNING! Warning Light — If Equipped Warning Light (MIL) A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as This warning light indicates the ESC is The Engine Check/Malfunction referenced above, can reach higher off. Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an temperatures than in normal operating Onboard Diagnostic System called Each time the ignition is turned to ON/ conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive OBD II that monitors engine and RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be slowly or park over flammable substances automatic transmission control systems. This on, even if it was turned off previously. such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is could result in death or serious injury to the Low Fuel Warning Light in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If driver, occupants or others. When the fuel level reaches the bulb does not come on when turning the approximately 2 gal (7.5 L), this light ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the will turn on and a chime will sound. The condition checked promptly. CAUTION! light will remain on until fuel is added. Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Low Washer Fluid Warning Light gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage the light after engine start. The vehicle should This warning light will illuminate when to the vehicle control system. It also could be serviced if the light stays on through several the windshield washer fluid is low. affect fuel economy and driveability. If the typical driving styles. In most situations, the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter vehicle will drive normally and will not require damage and power loss will soon occur. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — towing. Immediate service is required. If Equipped When the engine is running, the MIL may flash This warning light will illuminate when to alert serious conditions that could lead to Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly immediate loss of power or severe catalytic close the filler cap to disengage the converter damage. The vehicle should be This telltale will turn on to indicate the light. If the light does not turn off, serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not please see an authorized dealer. possible if this occurs. functioning properly and that service is required. Contact an authorized dealer. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81

Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Each tire, including the spare (if provided), Your vehicle has also been equipped with a Light — If Equipped should be checked monthly when cold and TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when inflated to the inflation pressure recommended the system is not operating properly. The TPMS This warning light will illuminate to by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle malfunction indicator is combined with the low indicate a fault in the Forward Collision placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your tire pressure telltale. When the system detects Warning System. Contact an authorized vehicle has tires of a different size than the size a malfunction, the telltale will flash for dealer for service Ú page 208. indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation approximately one minute and then remain Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) pressure label, you should determine the continuously illuminated. This sequence will 3 Warning Light proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as The warning light switches on and a As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been long as the malfunction exists. When the message is displayed to indicate that equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system the tire pressure is lower than the pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is may not be able to detect or signal low tire recommended value and/or that slow significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should occur for a variety of reasons, including the optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and installation of replacement or alternate tires or not be guaranteed. inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the Should one or more tires be in the condition significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or mentioned above, the display will show the more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure indications corresponding to each tire. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling that the replacement or alternate tires and and stopping ability. wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function CAUTION! properly. Do not continue driving with one or more flat Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using even if underinflation has not reached the level the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire authorized dealer as soon as possible. pressure telltale. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82

82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Turn Signal Indicator Lights CAUTION! GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS When the left or right turn signal is The TPMS has been optimized for the original Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped activated, the turn signal indicator will equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures flash independently and the and warning have been established for the This will display the distance setting corresponding exterior turn signal tire size equipped on your vehicle. for the ACC system when the system lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated Ú Undesirable system operation or sensor is engaged page 106. when the multifunction lever is moved down damage may result when using replacement Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With (left) or up (right). equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped NOTE: sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire This will display when the ACC is set  A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is sealants may cause the Tire Pressure and the vehicle in front is detected driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become Ú page 106. turn signal on. inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire Park/Headlight On Indicator Light sealant it is recommended that you take your  Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your This indicator light will illuminate either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. sensor function checked. when the park lights or headlights are turned on Ú page 45. ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will turn on when ECO Mode YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped is active. Refer to the Drive Modes This indicator light will illuminate Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator Supplement for further information. when the front fog lights are on Light — If Equipped Ú page 45. This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward Collision Warning is off. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83

Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — Speed Warning Indicator Light — BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS If Equipped If Equipped High Beam Indicator Light This indicator light will illuminate The indicator light will illuminate white This indicator light will illuminate to when the cruise control is set to the along with a notification text message indicate that the high beam desired speed Ú page 103. (Speed Warning Set to XX followed by headlights are on. With the low beams unit). When the set speed is just Sport Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped activated, push the multifunction exceeded, a single chime will sound along with lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to 3 This light will turn on when Sport pop up message of Speed Warning Exceeded. turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction Mode is active. When the set speed is exceeded, the indicator lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to will light up yellow and flash along with a Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement turn off the high beams. If the high beams are continuous chime (up to 10 seconds or until the for further information. off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary speed is no longer exceeded). WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario. NOTE: Cruise Control Ready Indicator The number “31” is only an example of a speed ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II This indicator light will illuminate that can be selected. Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated when the cruise control is ready, but Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This not set Ú page 103. system monitors the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light emissions, engine, and transmission control — If Equipped systems. When these systems are operating This light will turn on when ACC has properly, your vehicle will provide excellent been turned on, but is not set performance and fuel economy, as well as Ú page 106. engine emissions well within current government regulations. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84

84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If any of these systems require service, the OBD ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a and other information to assist your service In some localities, it may be a legal requirement connection port to allow access to information technician in making repairs. Although your to pass an inspection of your vehicle's related to the performance of your emissions vehicle will usually be drivable and not need emissions control system. Failure to pass could controls. Authorized service technicians may towing, see an authorized dealer for service as prevent vehicle registration. soon as possible. need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and For states that require an Inspection CAUTION! emissions system Ú page 132. and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause WARNING! Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on further damage to the emission control system. when the engine is running, and that the OBD II  ONLY an authorized service technician It could also affect fuel economy and drive- system is ready for testing. ability. The vehicle must be serviced before any should connect equipment to the OBD II emissions tests can be performed. connection port in order to read the VIN, Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The diagnose, or service your vehicle. OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is was recently serviced, recently had a dead running, severe catalytic converter damage  If unauthorized equipment is connected to battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II and power loss will soon occur. Immediate the OBD II connection port, such as a system should be determined not ready for the service is required. driver-behavior tracking device, it may: I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.  Be possible that vehicle systems, Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, including safety related systems, could which you can use prior to going to the test be impaired or a loss of vehicle control station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system could occur that may result in an acci- is ready, you must do the following: dent involving serious injury or death.  Access, or allow others to access, infor- 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, mation stored in your vehicle systems, but do not crank or start the engine. including personal information. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85

NOTE:  The MIL will not flash at all and will Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II If you crank or start the engine, you will have to remain fully illuminated until you place system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated start this test over. the ignition in the off position or start the during normal vehicle operation you should engine. This means that your vehicle's have your vehicle serviced before going to the 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to OBD II system is ready and you can I/M station. The I/M station can fail your the ON position, you will see the proceed to the I/M station. vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol running. come on as part of a normal bulb check. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should 3 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your things will happen: vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds nothing more than drive your vehicle as you and then return to being fully illuminated normally would in order for your OBD II system until you turn OFF the ignition or start the to update. A recheck with the above test routine engine. This means that your vehicle's may then indicate that the system is now ready. OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86

86 STARTING AND OPERATING

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — STARTING THE ENGINE WARNING! (Continued) IF EQUIPPED Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,  Do not leave the key fob in or near the adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- The gear selector must be in the PARK position your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other dren), and do not leave the ignition (of a before you can start the engine. Apply the occupants to buckle their seat belts. vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go) brakes before shifting into any driving gear. in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could WARNING! operate power windows, other controls, or CAUTION!  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure move the vehicle.  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only the ignition is in OFF mode, remove the key  Do not leave children or animals inside after the vehicle has come to a complete fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat stop.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or build-up may cause serious injury or death.  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is children in a vehicle unattended is MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED above idle speed. dangerous for a number of reasons. A child Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector  Before shifting into any gear, make sure or others could be seriously or fatally in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the starting vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a transmission gear selector. clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87

STARTING AND OPERATING 87

Tip Start Feature — Automatic ENGINE START/STOP button, wait 10 to 15 NOTE: Transmission seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” Normal starting of either a cold or a warm procedure. engine is obtained without pumping or pressing Place the ignition in the START mode and the accelerator pedal. release it as the starter engages. The starter 3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the motor will automatically disengage itself once engine prior to the engine starting, release To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the the ENGINE START/STOP button. START/STOP Button — Manual starter will disengage automatically in 10 Transmission Only seconds. If this occurs: NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm 1. With the vehicle stopped, place the gear 1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode. engine is obtained without pumping or pressing selector in NEUTRAL, then push and 4 2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds. the accelerator pedal. release the ENGINE START/STOP button. 3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE 2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode. START/STOP Button — Automatic 3. Place the gear selector in FIRST gear or NORMAL STARTING Transmission Only REVERSE and then apply the parking brake. To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE 1. The transmission must be in PARK. START/STOP Button — Manual NOTE: 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while Transmission Only  If the ignition switch is left in the ACC posi- pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button tion, the system will automatically time out 1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while once. after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition pushing and holding the ENGINE START/ 3. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will will switch to the OFF position. STOP button. disengage automatically after 10 seconds.  If the ignition switch is left in the RUN posi- 2. Release the ENGINE START/STOP button 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the tion, the system will automatically time out when the engine starts. If the vehicle fails to engine prior to the engine starting, push the after 30 minutes of inactivity if the vehicle start within 15 seconds, release the ENGINE START/STOP button again. speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and the engine is not running. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88

88 STARTING AND OPERATING

 If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE the ENGINE START/STOP button must be START/STOP button is pushed once, the WARNING! held for two seconds or three short pushes in instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle  Driver inattention could lead to failure to a row before the engine will shut off. The igni- Not In Park” message and the engine will place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A tion switch position will remain in the ACC remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK position until the vehicle is stopped, placed in the PARK position, or it could roll. by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is park and the button is pushed twice to the indicated in the instrument cluster display OFF position. NOTE: and on the gear selector. If the “P” indicator If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE (engine not running) position and the transmis- an added precaution, always apply the START/STOP Button — Automatic sion is in PARK, the system will automatically parking brake when exiting the vehicle. Transmission Only time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the  AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not ignition will switch to the OFF position. 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push designed to replace the need to shift your and release the ENGINE START/STOP AUTOPARK vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system button. and should not be relied upon as the AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in primary method by which the driver shifts 2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode. placing the vehicle in PARK should the the vehicle into PARK. situations on the following pages occur. It is a 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the back up system and should not be relied upon ENGINE START/STOP button must be held If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns as the primary method by which the driver shifts for two seconds or three short pushes in a off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark. the vehicle into PARK. row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph AutoPark will engage when all of these (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The The conditions under which AutoPark will conditions are met: ignition will remain in the ACC mode until engage are outlined on the following pages. the gear selector is in PARK and the button  Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed is pushed twice to the OFF mode. If the gear transmission  Vehicle is not in PARK 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89

STARTING AND OPERATING 89

 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the  Ignition switched from RUN to ACC cluster. instrument cluster display and on the gear NOTE: selector. As an added precaution, always apply NOTE: For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be engine will turn off and the ignition switch will displayed in the instrument cluster. In these COLD WEATHER OPERATION change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes, the igni- cases, the gear selector must be returned to “P” tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the (BELOW –22°F OR −30°C) to select desired gear. driver turns the ignition switch OFF. To ensure reliable starting at these If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the temperatures, use of an externally powered If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits 4 vehicle may AutoPark. electric engine block heater (available from an the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle authorized dealer) is recommended. may AutoPark. AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less. AutoPark will engage when all of these IF ENGINE FAILS TO START conditions are met: The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to If the engine fails to start after you have Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument  Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed followed the “Normal Starting” or “Cold cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph transmission Weather Operation” procedure, it may be (1.9 km/h). flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way  Vehicle is not in PARK to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine WARNING!  Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.  Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until Leave the ignition key in the RUN position,  Driver’s door is ajar the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph release the accelerator pedal and repeat the (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL “Normal Starting” procedure.  Brake pedal is not pressed position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90

90 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! AFTER STARTING ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —  Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid The idle speed is controlled automatically, and 3.6L & 5.7L it will decrease as the engine warms up. into the throttle body air inlet opening in an A long break-in period is not required for the attempt to start the vehicle. This could result ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and in flash fire causing serious personal injury. rear axle) in your new vehicle.  The engine block heater warms the engine, and Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), automatic transmission cannot be started the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are this way. Unburned fuel could enter the electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire desirable. catalytic converter and once the engine has extension cord. started, ignite and damage the converter The engine block heater must be plugged in at While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration and vehicle. least one hour to have an adequate warming within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle  If the vehicle has a discharged battery, effect on the engine. acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and booster cables may be used to obtain a The engine block heater cord is routed under should be avoided. start from a booster battery or the battery in the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has another vehicle. This type of start can be a removable cap that is located near the air box. The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle dangerous if done improperly Ú page 267. lubricant installed at the factory are high-quality WARNING! and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated CAUTION! Remember to disconnect the engine block climate and conditions under which vehicle heater cord before driving. Damage to the To prevent damage to the starter, do not operations will occur. For the recommended 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause continuously crank the engine for more than viscosity and quality grades Ú page 341. electrocution. 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before trying again. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91

STARTING AND OPERATING 91

NOTE: Manual Transmission — If Equipped CAUTION!  When the parking brake is applied and the The foot operated parking brake is positioned Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake below the lower left corner of the instrument Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is panel. To release the parking brake, pull the result. detected, a chime will sound to alert the parking brake release handle. driver. Fully release the parking brake before NOTE: attempting to move the vehicle. A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-  This light only shows that the parking brake is tion. This should be considered a normal part of applied. It does not show the degree of brake 4 the break-in and not interpreted as an indica- application. tion of difficulty. Please check your oil level with When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the the engine oil indicator often during the break in front wheels toward the curb on a downhill period. Add oil as required. grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic PARKING BRAKE transmission, apply the parking brake before Parking Brake Release Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the Automatic Transmission — If Equipped parking brake is fully applied and place the gear load on the transmission locking mechanism selector in the PARK or REVERSE (manual may make it difficult to move the gear selector The foot operated parking brake is located transmission only) position. out of PARK. The parking brake should always below the lower left corner of the instrument be applied whenever the driver is not in the panel. To apply the parking brake, firmly push When the parking brake is applied and the vehicle. the parking brake pedal fully. To release the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92

92 STARTING AND OPERATING

parking brake, press the parking brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) brake disengage.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or  Always fully apply the parking brake when with access to an unlocked vehicle. leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- cause damage or injury. Also be certain to tended is dangerous for a number of leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to reasons. A child or others could be seriously do so may allow the vehicle to roll and or fatally injured. Children should be cause damage or injury. warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. CAUTION!  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF If the Brake Warning Light remains on with mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle the parking brake released, a brake system Parking Brake and lock the vehicle. malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer  Do not leave the key fob in or near the immediately. WARNING! vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-  Never use the PARK position as a substi- dren, and do not leave the ignition of a tute for the parking brake. Always apply the vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED parking brake fully when parked to guard in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could against vehicle movement and possible operate power windows, other controls, or SIX-SPEED MANUAL TRANSMISSION injury or damage. move the vehicle. WARNING!  When exiting the vehicle, always remove  Be sure the parking brake is fully disen- the key fob from the ignition and lock your gaged before driving; failure to do so can You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle. lead to brake failure and a collision. vehicle unattended without having the (Continued) (Continued) parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93

STARTING AND OPERATING 93

CAUTION!  Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Ú page 203.  Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in damage to the clutch and Manual Gear Selector Shift Pattern 4 transmission. HIFTING The six-speed manual transmission has a  Do not rest your hand on the gear selector S spring that centers the gear selector near while driving, as this may result in transmis- Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off THIRD and FOUTH gear. This spring helps you sion synchronizer damage. the accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As know which gear you are in when you are  Do not attempt to shift the transmission if you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the shifting. Be careful when shifting from FIRST to the rear wheels are spinning due to loss of accelerator pedal. Damage to the transmission SECOND or downshifting from SIXTH to FIFTH. traction. Damage to the transmission may or clutch may occur if you do not fully press the occur. clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal when shifting. NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94

94 STARTING AND OPERATING

The spring will try to pull the gear selector You must always use FIRST gear (or REVERSE) toward THIRD and FOURTH gear. Make sure you CAUTION! when starting from a standing position. move the gear selector into SECOND or FIFTH Always make sure the vehicle comes to a RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS gear. If you let the gear selector move in the complete stop before shifting into REVERSE. direction of the pulling, you may end shifting Failure to do so may result in transmission To utilize your manual transmission efficiently from FIRST to FOURTH or from SIXTH to THIRD damage. for fuel economy, it should be upshifted as gear. listed in recommended shift speed chart.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS Axle Ratio 1-4 4-5 5-6 mph 20 37 48 3.90 km/h 32 59 77

Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions REVERSE. When at a complete stop, you may this may be more noticeable when the trans- (relatively steady speeds) may result in notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with mission is warm. This is a normal condition increased fuel economy. the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN and is not an indication of a problem with position for Keyless Enter-N-Go), as your clutch or transmission. Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a compared to the ignition LOCK position (OFF desired acceleration rate. position for Keyless Enter-N-Go). This is 1–4 SKIP SHIFT NOTE: normal operation of the transmission reverse In Auto Drive Mode, Default, or Street Drive inhibitor system. Modes, there are times when you must shift the  Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission transmission directly from FIRST gear to reverse inhibitor system. Always depress the  Due to the high performance nature of your clutch pedal fully to the floor before shifting drivetrain, you may hear your transmission. FOURTH gear instead of from FIRST gear to into REVERSE. When vehicle speed is greater This can be most noticeable when the vehicle SECOND gear. This is to help you get the best than 3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This activates to help prevent shifts into (clutch pedal released), but it may also be occurs when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is heard when driving at low engine RPM. Also, higher than 106°F (41°C), vehicle speed is 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95

STARTING AND OPERATING 95

greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is in CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) FIRST gear, and the accelerator is at ¼ throttle  Do not downshift into FIRST gear when the  The transmission may not engage PARK if or less. vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph the vehicle is moving. Always bring the After you shift the transmission to FOURTH gear, (24 km/h), as you could damage the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to you can press the clutch in and shift to another engine and/or clutch. PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) forward gear. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is DOWNSHIFTING completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, IF EQUIPPED 4 vehicle. downshift to maintain a safe speed when You must press and hold the brake pedal while descending a steep grade. shifting out of PARK.  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than WARNING! WARNING! idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel- Skipping more than one gear while  Never use the PARK position as a substi- erate quickly forward or in reverse. You downshifting, could cause you to lose control tute for the parking brake. Always apply the could lose control of the vehicle and hit of your vehicle. You could have a collision. parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle someone or something. Only shift into gear to guard against vehicle movement and when the engine is idling normally and your possible injury or damage. foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. CAUTION!  Your vehicle could move and injure you and (Continued)  If you skip more than one gear while down- others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to shifting or downshift at too high an engine move the transmission gear selector out of speed, you could damage the engine, trans- PARK with the brake pedal released. Make mission, or clutch. sure the transmission is in PARK before (Continued) exiting the vehicle. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96

96 STARTING AND OPERATING

the transmission in PARK. This system also WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) locks the transmission in PARK whenever the  Unintended movement of a vehicle could  Do not leave the key fob in or near the ignition is in the OFF mode. injure those in or near the vehicle. As with vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- NOTE: all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle dren), and do not leave the ignition in the The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when while the engine is running. Before exiting a ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could vehicle, always come to a complete stop, operate power windows, other controls, or the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the then apply the parking brake, shift the move the vehicle. engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission transmission into PARK, and turn the igni- is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode) before exiting the vehicle. CAUTION! mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT securing the vehicle against unwanted  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM movement. after the vehicle has come to a complete  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure stop. This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, key fob from the vehicle, and lock the NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is unless the brakes are applied. To shift the vehicle. above idle speed. transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or  Before shifting into any gear, make sure The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift with access to an unlocked vehicle. your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. tended is dangerous for a number of GNITION ARK NTERLOCK reasons. A child or others could be seriously I P I EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC or fatally injured. Children should be This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park TRANSMISSION warned not to touch the parking brake, Interlock which requires the transmission to be brake pedal or the transmission gear in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the The transmission gear range is displayed both selector. OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid on the gear selector and in the instrument (Continued) inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing cluster. To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear selector and move the 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97

STARTING AND OPERATING 97

selector rearward or forward. To shift the Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE NOTE: transmission out of PARK, the engine must be when the accelerator pedal is released and the If the gear selector cannot be moved to the running and the brake pedal must be pressed. vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when You must also press the brake pedal to shift the brake pedal when shifting between these pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the gears. (AutoStick, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi- vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. The transmission gear selector provides PARK, tion). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the trans- Select the DRIVE range for normal driving. REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL mission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear NOTE: (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)  The transmission electronics are self-cali- the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. 4 brating; therefore, the first few shifts on a while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position Gear Ranges new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select Do not press the accelerator pedal when a normal condition, and precision shifts will the transmission gear, and will display the shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). develop within a few hundred miles (kilome- current gear in the instrument cluster ters). Ú page 100. NOTE:  In the event of a mismatch between the gear After selecting any gear range, wait a moment selector position and the actual transmission to allow the selected gear to engage before gear (for example, driver selects PARK while accelerating. This is especially important when driving), the position indicator will blink the engine is cold. continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift PARK (P) can be completed. This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be The electronically-controlled transmission started in this range. Never attempt to use adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the along with environmental and road conditions. Automatic Transmission Gear Selector parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98

98 STARTING AND OPERATING

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) added precaution, turn the front wheels toward  The transmission may not engage PARK if  Unintended movement of a vehicle could the curb on a downhill grade and away from the the vehicle is moving. Always bring the injure those in or near the vehicle. As with curb on an uphill grade. vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle When exiting the vehicle, always: PARK, and verify that the transmission gear while the engine is running. Before exiting a position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) vehicle, always come to a complete stop,  Apply the parking brake. without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is then apply the parking brake, shift the completely stopped, and the PARK position transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-  Shift the transmission into PARK. is properly indicated, before exiting the tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF  Turn the ignition OFF. vehicle. mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted  Remove the key fob from the vehicle.  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than movement. WARNING! idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel- the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the  Never use the PARK position as a substi- erate quickly forward or in reverse. You key fob from the vehicle, and lock the tute for the parking brake. Always apply the could lose control of the vehicle and hit vehicle. parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle someone or something. Only shift into gear  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or to guard against vehicle movement and when the engine is idling normally and your possible injury or damage. with access to an unlocked vehicle. foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-  Your vehicle could move and injure you and (Continued) tended is dangerous for a number of others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to reasons. A child or others could be seriously move the transmission gear selector out of or fatally injured. Children should be PARK with the brake pedal released. Make warned not to touch the parking brake, sure the transmission is in PARK before brake pedal or the transmission gear exiting the vehicle. selector. (Continued) (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99

STARTING AND OPERATING 99

 Look at the transmission gear position WARNING! (Continued) display and verify that it indicates the PARK CAUTION!  Do not leave the key fob in or near the position (P), and is not blinking. Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- other reason with the transmission in  With the brake pedal released, verify that the dren), and do not leave the ignition in the NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission gear selector will not move out of PARK. ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could damage. operate power windows, other controls, or REVERSE (R) For Recreational Towing Ú page 129. move the vehicle. This range is for moving the vehicle backward. For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 273. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. 4 CAUTION! DRIVE (D)  Before moving the transmission gear NEUTRAL (N) This range should be used for most city and selector out of PARK, you must start the Use this range when the vehicle is standing for highway driving. It provides the smoothest engine, and also press the brake pedal. prolonged periods with the engine running. upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel Otherwise, damage to the gear selector Apply the parking brake and shift the economy. The transmission automatically could result. transmission into PARK if you must exit the upshifts through all forward gears.  DO NOT race the engine when shifting from vehicle. When frequent transmission shifting occurs PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, (such as when operating the vehicle under as this can damage the drivetrain. WARNING! heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off traveling into strong head winds, or while towing The following indicators should be used to the ignition to coast down a hill. These are a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control ensure that you have properly engaged the unsafe practices that limit your response to to select a lower gear Ú page 100. Under these transmission into the PARK position: changing traffic or road conditions. You might conditions, using a lower gear will improve  When shifting into PARK, push the lock lose control of the vehicle and have a performance and extend transmission life by button on the gear selector and firmly move collision. reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. the selector all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100

100 STARTING AND OPERATING

During cold temperatures, transmission or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may 5. Restart the engine. operation may be modified depending on be severely degraded and the engine may stall. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the engine and transmission temperature as well In some situations, the transmission may not problem is no longer detected, the as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm re-engage if the engine is turned off and transmission will return to normal up time of the engine and transmission to restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) operation. achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of may be illuminated. A message in the the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the NOTE: transmission fluid is warm. Normal operation more serious conditions, and indicate what Even if the transmission can be reset, we will resume once the transmission temperature actions may be necessary. recommend that you visit an authorized dealer has risen to a suitable level. In the event of a momentary problem, the at your earliest possible convenience. An autho- MANUAL (M) transmission can be reset to regain all forward rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to gears by performing the following steps: assess the condition of your transmission. If the The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer position) enables full manual control of NOTE: service is required. transmission shifting (also known as AutoStick In cases where the instrument cluster message mode Ú page 100. Toggling the gear selector indicates the transmission may not re-engage AutoStick forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL after engine shutdown, perform this procedure AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission (AutoStick) position will manually select the only in a desired location (preferably, at an feature providing manual shift control, giving transmission gear, and will display the current authorized dealer). you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick gear in the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc. 1. Stop the vehicle. allows you to maximize engine braking, Transmission Limp Home Mode eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if and improve overall vehicle performance. This Transmission function is monitored possible. If not, shift the transmission to system can also provide you with more control electronically for abnormal conditions. If a NEUTRAL. during passing, city driving, cold slippery condition is detected that could result in conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and transmission damage, Transmission Limp 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the many other situations. Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the engine turns off. transmission may operate only in certain gears, 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101

STARTING AND OPERATING 101

Operation NOTE: remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear  Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted described below. selector (in the MANUAL position), or the shift shift paddles (+/-) (if equipped), while the paddles to the MANUAL (M) position (beside the gear selector is in DRIVE, will activate a  In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector DRIVE (D) position), or tap one of the shift temporary AutoStick mode. Tapping (-) to in DRIVE), the transmission will automatically paddles on the steering wheel. Tapping the (-) enter AutoStick mode will downshift the shift up when maximum engine speed is shift paddle to enter AutoStick mode will transmission to the next lower gear, while reached. If the accelerator is fully pressed, downshift the transmission to the next lower tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will the transmission will downshift when gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode retain the current gear. The current gear will possible. Lack of accelerator pedal activity will retain the current gear. The current be displayed in the instrument cluster, but will cause the transmission to revert to auto- 4 transmission gear will be displayed in the the “M” will not be highlighted. The transmis- matic operation. sion will revert back to normal operation (if instrument cluster.  If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear the gear selector remains in DRIVE) after a selector in MANUAL position), manual gear period of time, depending on accelerator selection will be maintained until the gear pedal activity. selector is returned to DRIVE, or as described  In some models, the shift paddles may be below. The transmission will not upshift auto- disabled (or re-enabled, as desired) using matically at redline in this mode, nor will Drive Mode Set-Up, accessed by selecting downshifts be obtained if the accelerator Performance Control. pedal is pressed to the floor. In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up  The transmission will automatically down- or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear. Shifter Paddles driver (using the gear selector, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine lugging 1 — (–) Shift Paddle or overspeed condition would result. It will 2 — (+) Shift Paddle 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102

102 STARTING AND OPERATING

 The transmission will automatically down- To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear steering feel. This mode may be activated and shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop. selector to the DRIVE position, or press and hold deactivated by pushing the SPORT button on After a stop, the driver should manually the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear the instrument panel switch bank. upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is selector is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once again NOTE: accelerated. indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift If equipped with a manual transmission, the in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without  You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or 1 - 4 Skip Shift Feature is disabled in SPORT taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. SECOND gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will Mode. allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in WARNING! SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or icy FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L — conditions. Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive IF EQUIPPED  If a requested downshift would cause the wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur This feature offers improved fuel economy by could skid, causing a collision or personal and an indication will display. shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders injury. during light load and cruise conditions. The  The system will ignore attempts to upshift at system is automatic with no driver inputs or too low of a vehicle speed and an indication SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE additional driving skills required. When the will display. system is active, an indication will display within  Holding the (-) paddle pressed (if equipped), CONTROL the instrument cluster “Fuel Economy” main or holding the gear selector in the (-) position, Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode menu screen. will downshift the transmission to the lowest feature. This mode is a configuration set up for NOTE: gear possible at the current speed. typical enthusiast driving. The engine, This system may take some time to return to full transmission (when equipped with automatic  Transmission shifting will be more noticeable functionality after a battery disconnect. transmission), and steering systems are all set when AutoStick is enabled. to their SPORT settings. SPORT Mode will  The system may revert to automatic shift provide improved throttle response and mode if a fault or overheat condition is modified shifting for an enhanced driving detected. experience, as well the greatest amount of 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103

STARTING AND OPERATING 103 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING NOTE: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED The Electric Power Steering system will give you  Even if the power steering assistance is no Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise good vehicle response and increased ease of longer operational, it is still possible to steer Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will the vehicle. Under these conditions there will (ACC) system: vary its assist to provide light efforts while be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking  Cruise Control for cruising at a constant parking and good feel while driving. If the preset speed. electric steering system experiences a fault that maneuvers. prevents it from providing assist, you will still  If the condition persists, see an authorized  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining have the ability to steer the vehicle manually. dealer for service. a set distance between you and the vehicle ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to 4 WARNING! If the Steering icon is displayed and the automatically adjust the preset speed. “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” Continued operation with reduced assist message is displayed on the instrument cluster NOTE: could pose a safety risk to yourself and screen, they indicate that extreme steering In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC others. Service should be obtained as soon maneuvers may have occurred which caused distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control as possible. an over temperature condition in the power will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. steering system. Once driving conditions are Always be aware of the mode selected. Alternate electric power steering efforts can be safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED selected through the Uconnect System moments until the icon and message turn off. Ú page 133. When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is 25 mph (40 km/h) or 20 mph (32 km/h), displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” depending on engine size and axle ratio. or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within the instrument cluster display, this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service Ú page 76. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104

104 STARTING AND OPERATING

The Cruise Control buttons are located on the Control system can be reactivated by pushing right side of the steering wheel. the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting WARNING! the desired vehicle set speed. Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could WARNING! accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control Cruise Control can be dangerous where the and have an accident. Always ensure the system cannot maintain a constant speed. system is OFF when you are not using it. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control To Set A Desired Speed in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle icy, snow-covered or slippery. has reached the desired speed, push the SET Cruise Control Buttons (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the 1 — On/Off To Activate accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the 2 — CANC/Cancel selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH 3 — SET (+)/Accel Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear (km/h)” will appear indicating what speed was 4 — RES/Resume in the instrument cluster display to indicate the set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set 5 — SET (-)/Decel Cruise Control is on. To turn the system off, speed will also appear and stay on in the push the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE instrument cluster when the speed is set. NOTE: CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is Control system has been designed to shut down off. The system should be turned off when not if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated in use. at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105

STARTING AND OPERATING 105

To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing To Resume Speed To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed While the Cruise Control system is set, press the To resume a previously set speed, push the RES When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase accelerator to pass as you would normally. button and release. Resume can be used at any speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or When the pedal is released, the vehicle will speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. return to the set speed. To Deactivate U.S. Speed (mph) Using Cruise Control On Hills A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once The transmission may downshift on hills to button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each maintain the vehicle set speed. the Cruise Control system without erasing the set speed from memory. subsequent tap of the button results in an The Cruise Control system maintains speed up 4 adjustment of 1 mph. and down hills. A slight speed change on Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF position erases the set speed from  If the button is continually pushed, the set moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a memory. speed will continue to adjust until the button greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may is released, then the new set speed will be be preferable to drive without Cruise Control. The following conditions will also deactivate the established. Cruise Control without erasing the set speed WARNING! from memory: Metric Speed (km/h) Cruise Control can be dangerous where the  Vehicle parking brake is applied  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once system cannot maintain a constant speed. will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Your vehicle could go too fast for the  Stability event occurs Each subsequent tap of the button results in conditions, and you could lose control and  Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE an adjustment of 1 km/h. have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control  Engine overspeed occurs  If the button is continually pushed, the set in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, speed will continue to adjust until the button icy, snow-covered or slippery.  Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmis- is released, then the new set speed will be sion only) established. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106

106 STARTING AND OPERATING

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —  Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica- WARNING! (Continued) IF EQUIPPED tions to the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and  The ACC system: Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the Forward Collision Warning system.  Does not react to pedestrians, driving convenience provided by Cruise Control oncoming vehicles, and stationary while traveling on highways and major NOTE: objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a roadways. However, it is not a safety system Cruise Control will not detect vehicles directly traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). and not designed to prevent collisions. The ahead of you. Always be aware of the mode Ú Cruise Control function performs differently selected page 348.  Cannot take street, traffic, and weather Ú page 103. conditions into account, and may be WARNING! limited upon adverse sight distance ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control conditions. engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve- without the constant need to reset your Cruise nience system. It is not a substitute for  Does not always fully recognize Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a active driver involvement. It is always the complex driving conditions, which can forward facing camera designed to detect a driver’s responsibility to be attentive of result in wrong or missing distance vehicle directly ahead of you to maintain a set road, traffic, and weather conditions, warnings. speed. vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-  Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop NOTE: tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle while following a vehicle ahead and under all road conditions. Your complete hold the vehicle for two seconds in the  If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, attention is always required while driving to stop position. If the vehicle ahead does ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate maintain safe control of your vehicle. not start moving within two seconds the (not to exceed the original set speed) auto- Failure to follow these warnings can result ACC system will display a message that matically to maintain a preset following in a collision and death or serious personal the system will release the brakes and distance, while matching the speed of the injury. that the brakes must be applied manu- vehicle ahead. (Continued) ally. An audible chime will sound when the brakes are released. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107

STARTING AND OPERATING 107

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu WARNING! (Continued) The Cruise Control buttons (located on the right The instrument cluster display shows the You should switch off the ACC system: side of the steering wheel) operate the Adaptive current ACC system settings. The information it  When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy Cruise Control (ACC) system. displays depends on ACC system status. snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off driving situations (i.e., in highway construc- button until one of the following appears in the tion zones). instrument cluster display:  When entering a turn lane or highway off Adaptive Cruise Control Off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or When ACC is deactivated, the display will read 4 have steep uphill or downhill slopes. “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”  When towing a trailer up or down steep Adaptive Cruise Control Ready slopes. When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed  When circumstances do not allow safe Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons setting has not been selected, the display will driving at a constant speed. read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” 1 — CANC/Cancel Adaptive Cruise Control Set 2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off 3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is 4 — Distance Decrease pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.” 5 — SET (+)/Accel When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the 6 — RES/Resume instrument cluster display. 7 — SET (-)/Decel 8 — Distance Increase 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108

108 STARTING AND OPERATING

The ACC screen may display once again if any of NOTE: the following ACC activity occurs: You cannot engage ACC under the following WARNING!  System Cancel conditions: Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You  When the brakes are applied.  Driver Override could accidentally set the system or cause it  to go faster than you want. You could lose  System Off When the parking brake is applied. control and have a collision. Always ensure   ACC Proximity Warning When the automatic transmission is in PARK, the system is off when you are not using it. REVERSE or NEUTRAL.  ACC Unavailable Warning  When the vehicle speed is below the To Set A Desired ACC Speed The instrument cluster display will return to the minimum speed range. When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, last display selected after five seconds of no  push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button ACC display activity When the brakes are overheated. and release. The instrument cluster display will Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) To Activate/Deactivate show the set speed. Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control The minimum set speed for the ACC system is NOTE: (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the 20 mph (32 km/h). Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.” The system will cancel when the vehicle speed an ACC distance set. To change between the drops below 15 mph (24 km/h). To turn the system off, push and release the different modes, push the ACC on/off button Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise When the system is turned on and in the ready again. At this time, the system will turn off and Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on Ready.” Control (ACC) Off.” (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode. When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109

STARTING AND OPERATING 109

NOTE:  The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE WARNING! position.  Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-  The Electronic Stability Control/Traction system will not react to vehicles ahead. In erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the Control System (ESC/TCS) activates. addition, the proximity warning does not message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in activate and no alarm will sound even if you The following conditions will only cancel the ACC the instrument cluster display. are too close to the vehicle ahead since system: neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor  If you continue to accelerate beyond the set  The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be speed while an ACC distance is also set, the (24 km/h). sure to maintain a safe distance between system will not be controlling the distance 4 your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. To Turn Off aware which mode is selected. The vehicle speed will only be determined by The system will turn off and erase the set speed the position of the accelerator pedal. in memory if: If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below To Cancel  The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to button is pushed 20 mph (20 km/h). The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control systems:  The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button NOTE:  The brake pedal is applied. is pushed Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph (32 km/h).  The parking brake is applied.  The ignition is placed in the OFF position If either system is set when the vehicle speed is  The CANC (cancel) button is pushed. above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall  An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event be the current speed of the vehicle. occurs. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110

110 STARTING AND OPERATING

To Resume U.S. Speed (mph) When An ACC Distance Is Also Set: If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once NOTE: (resume) button and remove your foot from the will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster subsequent tap of the button results in an  When you use the SET (-) button to decel- display will show the last set speed. adjustment of 1 mph. erate, if the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set Resume can be used at any speed above  If the button is continually pushed, the set speed, the brake system will automatically 20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre- slow the vehicle. Cruise Control is being used. ments until the button is released. The new  The ACC system applies the brake down to Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph set speed is reflected in the instrument 15 mph (24 km/h) when following a vehicle (0 km/h) when ACC is active. cluster display. ahead. Metric Speed (km/h) WARNING!  The ACC system maintains set speed when  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight The Resume function should only be used if will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. speed change on moderate hills is normal. In traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming Each subsequent tap of the button results in addition, downshifting may occur while a set speed that is too high or too low for an adjustment of 1 km/h. climbing uphill or descending downhill. This prevailing traffic and road conditions could  is normal operation and necessary to main- cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate If the button is continually pushed, the set tain set speed. When driving uphill and down- too sharply for safe operation. Failure to speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking follow these warnings can result in a collision increments until the button is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instrument temperature exceeds normal range (over- and death or serious personal injury. cluster display. heated). To Vary The Speed Setting NOTE: Setting The Following Distance In ACC When you override and push the SET (+) button To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed The specified following distance for ACC can be or SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the set by varying the distance setting between four While ACC is set, you can increase speed by current speed of the vehicle. bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed (medium) and one bar (short). Using this by pushing the SET (-) button. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111

STARTING AND OPERATING 111

distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC Each time the button is pushed, the distance NOTE: calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle setting decreases by one bar (shorter). The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ahead. This distance setting will show in the If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will ACC system applies the brakes. instrument cluster display. maintain the set speed. If a slower moving A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC vehicle is detected in the same lane, the predicts that its maximum braking level is not instrument cluster display will show the sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the Vehicle Light, and the system adjusts vehicle instrument cluster display and a chime will speed automatically to maintain the distance sound while ACC continues to apply its setting, regardless of the set speed. maximum braking capacity. 4 The vehicle will then maintain the set distance NOTE: until: The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster  The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed display is a warning for the driver to take action Distance Settings above the set speed. and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying  The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars) the brakes autonomously. 2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars) view of the sensor. 3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)  The distance setting is changed. Overtake Aid 4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar) When driving with ACC engaged and following a  Ú The system disengages page 108. vehicle, the system will provide an additional To increase the distance setting, push the The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in Distance Setting Increase button and release. however, the driver can always apply the brakes passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration Each time the button is pushed, the distance manually, if necessary. is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn setting increases by one bar (longer). signal and will only be active when passing on To decrease the distance setting, push the the left hand side. Distance Setting Decrease button and release. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112

112 STARTING AND OPERATING

Display Warnings And Maintenance NOTE:  If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar damaged due to a collision, see an autho- “Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise rized dealer for service. Warning Control is still available.  Do not attach or install any accessories near The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver the sensor, including transparent material or Sensor” warning will display and a chime will should examine the sensor. It may require aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an sound when conditions temporarily limit system cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The ACC system failure or malfunction. performance. sensor is located in the center of the vehicle When the condition that deactivated the system This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, behind the lower grille. is no longer present, the system will return to such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will may also become temporarily blinded due to important to note the following maintenance resume function by simply reactivating it. obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these items: cases, the instrument cluster display will display NOTE: “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe Sensor” and the system will deactivate. the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious  If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front not to damage the sensor lens. Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar (e.g. more than once on every trip) without Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed  Do not remove any screws from the sensor. any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels Doing so could cause an ACC system have the radar sensor realigned at an autho- with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC malfunction or failure and require a sensor rized dealer. system will recover after the vehicle has left realignment. these areas. Under rare conditions, when the  Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is path this warning may temporarily occur. not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113

STARTING AND OPERATING 113

Service ACC/FCW Warning Offset Driving Turns And Bends If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a system may decrease the vehicle speed and Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may acceleration for stability reasons, with no Required”, there may be an internal system fault not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. vehicle detected ahead. Once the vehicle is out or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC The offset vehicle may move in and out of the of the curve the system will resume your original functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily brake or accelerate unexpectedly. functionality. unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC NOTE: again later, following an ignition cycle. If the 4 On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. problem persists, see an authorized dealer. The driver must maintain control of the vehicle, Precautions While Driving With ACC remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if In certain driving situations, ACC may have needed. detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene. The following are examples of these types of situations: Offset Driving Condition Example Towing A Trailer Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.

Turn Or Bend Example 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114

114 STARTING AND OPERATING

Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing Narrow Vehicles When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, completely in the lane in which you are edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not detected until they have moved fully into the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the limited. may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for vehicle ahead. the ACC system to take action. ACC may not NOTE: detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. The driver must maintain control of the vehicle, There may not be sufficient distance to the remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and needed. ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Narrow Vehicle Example

ACC Hill Example Lane Changing Example 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115

STARTING AND OPERATING 115

Stationary Objects And Vehicles For limitations of this system and PARKSENSE DISPLAY recommendations, see Ú page 119. ACC does not react to stationary objects and When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not ParkSense will retain the last system state display will turn on indicating the system status. react in situations where the vehicle you are (enabled or disabled) from the previous ignition following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/ The system will indicate a detected obstacle by is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and RUN position. showing a single arc in one or more regions ready to apply the brakes if necessary. based on the obstacle’s distance and location ParkSense can be active only when the gear relative to the vehicle. selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector position, the system will If an obstacle is detected in the center rear remain active until the vehicle speed is region, the display will show a single solid arc in 4 increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or the center rear region and will produce a above. The system will become active again if one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less closer to the obstacle, the display will show the than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to PARKSENSE SENSORS continuous. The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the rear region, the display will show a single vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — The sensors can detect obstacles from and will produce a fast sound tone. As the IF EQUIPPED approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/ display will show the single arc moving closer to The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system bumper in the horizontal direction, depending the vehicle and the sound tone will change from provides visual and audible indications of the on the location, type and orientation of the fast to continuous. distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a obstacle. detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver). 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116

116 STARTING AND OPERATING

Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc 2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc 3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117

STARTING AND OPERATING 117

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING ALERTS Greater than Less than Rear Distance 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches 79 inches 12 inches (inches/cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (200 cm) (30 cm) Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Audible Alert Second Tone None (for rear center (for rear center (for rear center Fast Continuous 4 Chime (for rear center only) only) only) only) Arc — Left Rear None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Arc — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Rear Arc — Right Rear None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Reduced 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118

118 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY The ParkSense switch LED will be on when If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster The ParkSense Warning screen will only be ParkSense switch LED will be off when the display, make sure the outer surface and the displayed if Sound and Display is selected from system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is inside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and Ú within the Uconnect system page 133. pushed, and the system requires service, the clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other The ParkSense Warning screen is located within ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the the instrument cluster display Ú page 69. It and then the LED will be on. message continues to appear see an provides visual warnings to indicate the authorized dealer. SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK distance between the rear fascia/bumper and ASSIST SYSTEM If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE the detected obstacle. REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense display, see an authorized dealer. Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM the ParkSense switch, located on the switch single chime, once per ignition cycle and it will Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, panel below the Uconnect display. display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use When the ParkSense switch is pushed REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean to disable the system, the instrument UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high cluster will display the “ParkSense for five seconds. pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches Off” message for approximately five When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or seconds. When the gear selector is moved to and the system has detected a faulted poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage REVERSE and the system is disabled, the condition, the instrument cluster display will the sensors. instrument cluster display will display the display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE “ParkSense Off” message for as long as the REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE vehicle is in REVERSE. UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119

STARTING AND OPERATING 119

 ParkSense will reduce the volume of the PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE WARNING! PRECAUTIONS radio when it is sounding an audio tone. Drivers must be careful when backing up even  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, NOTE: when using the Rear Park Assist system. taking care not to scratch or damage them. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and  The sensors must not be covered with ice, Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots ParkSense system operating properly. so can result in the system not working prop- before backing up. You are responsible for the erly. The ParkSense system might not detect  Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra- an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it safety of your surroundings and must continue tions could affect the performance of Park- could provide a false indication that an to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do 4 Sense or render the system temporarily obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. so can result in serious injury or death. unavailable.  Ensure the ParkSense system is off if objects  When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., CAUTION! instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the OFF" for five seconds. Furthermore, once you  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can unable to recognize every obstacle, turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you result in the system misinterpreting a close turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition. including small obstacles. Parking curbs object as a sensor problem, causing the might be temporarily detected or not  When you move the gear selector to the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE detected at all. Obstacles located above or REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned REQUIRED” message to be shown in the below the sensors will not be detected off, the instrument cluster display will show instrument cluster display. when they are in close proximity. the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long  The vehicle must be driven slowly when as the vehicle is in REVERSE. using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120

120 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA PARK, the vehicle's ignition is placed in the OFF The following table shows the approximate position, or by pressing the image defeat “X” distances for each zone: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you button. to see an on-screen image of the rear Distance To The Rear When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE Zone surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear Of The Vehicle (with Camera Delay turned off), the rear camera selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) mode is exited and the last touchscreen camera is located on the rear of the vehicle 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - appears again. Yellow above the rear license plate. The image will be 2 m) displayed in the touchscreen display along with When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on 6.5 ft or greater (2 m a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle Green across the top of the screen. After five seconds, and its projected backup path based on the or greater) this note will disappear. steering wheel position. The active guidelines will show separate zones that will help indicate WARNING! NOTE: the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has Drivers must be careful when backing up If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph programmable modes of operation that may be even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up (13 km/h), the rear view camera image will selected through the Uconnect system Camera. Always check carefully behind your Ú continue to be displayed until the transmission page 133. vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera placed in the OFF position, or the image defeat spots before backing up. You are responsible Delay feature and it is turned on, the rear “X” button is pressed. camera image will be displayed for up to 10 for the safety of your surroundings and must Different colored zones indicate the distance to seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of continue to pay attention while backing up. the rear of the vehicle. REVERSE. However, this feature is canceled if Failure to do so can result in serious injury or the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph death. (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121

STARTING AND OPERATING 121

CAUTION! CAUTION!  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should  Damage to the fuel system or emissions only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView control system could result from using an camera is unable to view every obstacle or improper fuel tank filler tube cap. object in your drive path.  A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impu-  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must rities into the fuel system. be driven slowly when using ParkView to be  A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the able to stop in time when an obstacle is “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn seen. It is recommended that the driver Fuel Filler Cap on. 4 look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. NOTE:  To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap “top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel NOTE: tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door. tank is full. If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, WARNING! NOTE: rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do  Never have any smoking materials lit in or not cover the lens. near the vehicle when the fuel door is open  When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the REFUELING THE VEHICLE or the tank is being filled. fuel tank is full.  Never add fuel when the engine is running.  Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door This is in violation of most state and federal sound. This is an indication that the gas cap on the left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to fire regulations and may cause the is tightened properly. The MIL in the instru- pull open the door. If the gas cap is lost or “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on. ment cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for  A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap use with this vehicle. portable container that is inside of a is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled. vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122

122 STARTING AND OPERATING

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label (GVWR) the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, affixed to the drivers side B-pillar or the rear of The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your or damaged, a ”gASCAP” message will display in the driver’s door. vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and the odometer or a “Check Gascap” message will The label contains the following information: cargo. The total load must be limited so that you display in the instrument cluster. If this occurs, do not exceed the GVWR. tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the  Name of manufacturer GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR) Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If  Month and year of manufacture the problem continues, the message will appear The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front  the next time the vehicle is started. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel  Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do filler cap may also turn on the MIL. not exceed either front or rear GAWR.  Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear VEHICLE LOADING  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) WARNING! Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is  Type of vehicle shown on the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This is important that you do not exceed the information should be used for passenger and  Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH) maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is luggage loading as indicated. The bar code allows a computer scanner to read exceeded. You could lose control of the the VIN. Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle vehicle and have a collision. Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123

STARTING AND OPERATING 123

OVERLOADING have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS is within the specified GVWR, you must The load carrying components (axle, springs, redistribute the weight. Improper weight The following trailer towing related definitions tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide distribution can have an adverse effect on the will assist you in understanding the following satisfactory service as long as you do not way your vehicle steers and handles and the information: exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR. way the brakes operate. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The best way to figure out the total weight of NOTE: The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and ready for operation. Weigh it on a to the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's and tongue weight. The total load must be commercial scale to ensure that it is not over GVWR and GAWRs Ú page 122. limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR 4 the GVWR. Ú page 122. Figure out the weight on the front and rear of TRAILER TOWING Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear In this section, you will find safety tips and The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the axles. information on limits to the type of towing you weight of all cargo, consumables, and can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in Overloading can cause potential safety hazards towing a trailer, carefully review this information or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or to tow your load as efficiently and safely as operation" condition. suspension components do not necessarily possible. increase the vehicle's GVWR. The recommended way to measure GTW is to To maintain warranty coverage, follow the put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. LOADING requirements and recommendations in this The entire weight of the trailer must be To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its manual concerning vehicles used for trailer supported by the scale. towing. empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Store heavier items down low and be sure you Manual Transmission — If Equipped The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Trailer towing with this vehicle is not vehicle and trailer when weighed in Stow all loose items securely before driving. If recommended. combination. weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124

124 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and the trailer tongue that typically provides sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front adjustable friction associated with the contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted stability. Trailer sway control and a weight and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do trailer swaying motions while traveling. distributing (load equalizing) hitch are not exceed either front or rear GAWR If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) Ú page 122. swaying trailer and automatically applies and may be required depending on vehicle and individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine trailer configuration/loading to comply with WARNING! power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. It is important that you do not exceed the Weight-Carrying Hitch WARNING! maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer  An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing driving condition can result if either rating is tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located exceeded. You could lose control of the Hitch system may reduce handling, at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of stability, braking performance, and could vehicle and have a collision. the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are result in a collision. commonly used to tow small and medium sized  Weight Distributing Systems may not be Tongue Weight (TW) trailers. compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. The TW is the downward force exerted on the Weight-Distributing Hitch Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac- hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this A weight-distributing system works by applying turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle as part of the load on your vehicle. leverage through spring (load) bars. They are dealer for additional information. Trailer Frontal Area typically used for heavier loads to distribute The frontal area is the maximum height trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in multiplied by the maximum width of the front of The following chart provides the industry accordance with the manufacturer's directions, a trailer. standard for the maximum trailer weight a given it provides for a more level ride, offering more trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to Trailer Sway Control (TSC) consistent steering and brake control thereby assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link enhancing towing safety. The addition of a for your intended towing condition. that can be installed between the hitch receiver friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125

STARTING AND OPERATING 125

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,722 kg) Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. 4 All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. 3.6L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) 5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

Trailer towing with the 5.7L manual transmission, 6.4L and 6.2L Supercharged engine is not recommended. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126

126 STARTING AND OPERATING

TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: WARNING! Never exceed the maximum tongue weight   The tongue weight of the trailer. Make certain that the load is secured in the stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch. trailer and will not shift during travel. When  The weight of any other type of cargo or trailering cargo that is not fully secured, equipment put in or on your vehicle. dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose  The weight of the driver and all passengers. control of your vehicle and have a collision. NOTE:  When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do Remember that everything put into or on the not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over- trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, loading can cause a loss of control, poor additional factory-installed options or performance or damage to brakes, axle, dealer-installed options must be considered as engine, transmission, steering, suspension, part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to chassis structure or tires. Weight Distribution the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for  Safety chains must always be used the maximum combined weight of occupants between your vehicle and trailer. Always CAUTION! and cargo for your vehicle. connect the chains to the hook retainers of Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in TOWING REQUIREMENTS the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the the trailer tongue and allow enough slack GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle for turning corners. balanced over the wheels or heavier in the drivetrain components, the following guidelines (Continued) rear can cause the trailer to sway severely are recommended. side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127

STARTING AND OPERATING 127

 Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! damage before towing a trailer.  Vehicles with trailers should not be parked  Do not tow a trailer at all during the first  Replacing tires with a higher load carrying on a grade. When parking, apply the 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the driven. The engine, axle or other parts could and GAWR limits. tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always, be damaged. Ú block or "chock" the trailer wheels.  Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)  For further information page 311.  GCWR must not be exceeded. that a trailer is towed, do not drive over Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts  Total weight must be distributed between  at full throttle. This helps the engine and Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the 4 other parts of the vehicle wear in at the system or vacuum system of your vehicle following four ratings are not exceeded: heavier loads. with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-  Max loading as defined on the “Tire and equate braking and possible personal injury. Loading Information” placard. Towing Requirements — Tires  An electronically actuated trailer brake  controller is required when towing a trailer GTW  Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a with electronically actuated brakes. When  GAWR compact spare tire. towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic  Tongue weight rating for the trailer  Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) surge actuated brake system, an electronic hitch utilized. when towing while using a full size spare tire. brake controller is not required.  Proper tire inflation pressures are essential  Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers Perform the maintenance listed in the to the safe and satisfactory operation of your over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for Ú “Scheduled Servicing” page 275. When vehicle. For proper tire inflation procedures. trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128

128 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And WARNING! Wiring  Do not connect trailer brakes to your Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over- trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the load your brake system and cause it to fail. trailer are required for motoring safety. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory  Towing any trailer will increase your stop- approved trailer harness and connector. ping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your NOTE: Four-Pin Connector vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s 1 — Ground Failure to do so could result in an accident. wiring harness. 2 — Park The electrical connections are all complete to 3 — Left Stop/Turn CAUTION! the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a 4 — Right Stop/Turn trailer connector. Refer to the following If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs illustrations. (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate NOTE: capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake  Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. vehicle before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.  Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129

STARTING AND OPERATING 129

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped AutoStick Select the DRIVE range when towing. The  When using the AutoStick shift control, select transmission controls include a drive strategy to the highest gear that allows for adequate avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if performance and avoids frequent down- frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired can use the AutoStick shift control to manually speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” select a lower gear. if needed to maintain the desired speed. NOTE:  To prevent excess heat generation, avoid Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce Seven-Pin Connector 4 under heavy loading conditions will improve vehicle speed as necessary to avoid 1 — Battery performance and extend transmission life by extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and 2 — Backup Lamps reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. road conditions allow. 3 — Right Stop/Turn This action will also provide better engine 4 — Electric Brakes braking. RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND 5 — Ground Cruise Control — If Equipped 6 — Left Stop/Turn MOTORHOME)  Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy 7 — Running Lamps loads. Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. TOWING TIPS  When using the Cruise Control, if you experi- The only acceptable method for towing this ence speed drops greater than 10 mph vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground. backing up the trailer in an area located away to cruising speed. from heavy traffic.  Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130

130 STARTING AND OPERATING

 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first CAUTION! WARNING! become visible. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is  Keep tires properly inflated. requirements can cause severe engine, dangerous. Unequal traction can cause transmission and/or transfer case damage. sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could  Maintain sufficient distance between your Damage from improper towing is not covered lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully a collision in a sudden stop. whenever there is likely to be poor traction Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). DRIVING TIPS Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Traction given axle for improved handling. When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is Information in this section will aid in safe DRIVING THROUGH WATER controlled launches in adverse conditions. possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is Driving through water more than a few inches/ Acceleration known as hydroplaning and may cause partial centimeters deep will require extra caution to Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ensure safety and prevent damage to your other slippery surfaces may cause the driving ability. To reduce this possibility, the following vehicle. wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This precautions should be observed: phenomenon occurs when there is a difference  Slow down during rainstorms or when the in the surface traction under the rear (driving) roads are slushy. wheels.  Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131

STARTING AND OPERATING 131

Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!  Driving through standing water limits your  Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when Do not drive on or across a road or path vehicle’s braking capabilities, which driving through standing water. This will where water is flowing and/or rising (as in increases stopping distances. Therefore, minimize wave effects. after driving through standing water, drive storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away  Driving through standing water may cause the road or path's surface and cause your slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo- vehicle to sink into deeper water. several times to dry the brakes. nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can  Failure to follow these warnings may result (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is 4 follow this warning may result in injuries that your passengers, and others around you. milky or foamy in appearance) after driving are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, through standing water. Do not continue to and others around you. operate the vehicle if any fluid appears CAUTION! contaminated, as this may result in further Shallow Standing Water  Always check the depth of the standing damage. Such damage is not covered by water before driving through it. Never drive the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although your vehicle is capable of driving through standing water that is deeper than  through shallow standing water, consider the Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the following Warnings and Cautions before doing so. can cause it to lock up and stall out, and vehicle. cause serious internal damage to the WARNING!  Determine the condition of the road or the engine. Such damage is not covered by the path that is under water and if there are any New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  Driving through standing water limits your obstacles in the way before driving through vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not the standing water. exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving (Continued) through standing water. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132

132 MULTIMEDIA

UCONNECT SYSTEMS Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of WARNING! For detailed information about your Uconnect unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle  It is not possible to know or to predict all of 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, systems and wireless communications. Vehicle the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual software technology continues to evolve over systems are breached. It may be possible Supplement. time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a NOTE: evaluates and takes appropriate steps as loss of vehicle control could occur that may Uconnect screen images are for illustration needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, result in an accident involving serious injury purposes only and may not reflect exact soft- your vehicle may require software updates to or death. ware for your vehicle. improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of  ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into CYBERSECURITY unauthorized and unlawful access to your your vehicle if it came from a trusted vehicle systems. source. Media of unknown origin could Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to possibly contain malicious software, and if may be equipped with both wired and wireless your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the installed in your vehicle, it may increase the networks. These networks allow your vehicle to most recent version of vehicle software (such as possibility for vehicle systems to be send and receive information. This information Uconnect software) is installed. breached. allows systems and features in your vehicle to  function properly. As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133

MULTIMEDIA 133 NOTE: UCONNECT SETTINGS Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button  FCA US LLC or an authorized dealer may The Uconnect system uses a combination of again or tap the screen to turn the screen on. contact you directly regarding software buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a updates. faceplate located on the center of the Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.  To help further improve vehicle security and instrument panel. These buttons allow you to minimize the potential risk of a security access and change the Customer CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES breach, vehicle owners should: Programmable Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.  Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca Buttons on the faceplate are located below (Canadian Residents) to learn about and/or beside the Uconnect system in the available Uconnect software updates. center of the instrument panel. In addition, 5 there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on  Only connect and use trusted media the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, through menus and change settings. Push the USBs, CDs). center of the control knob one or more times to Privacy of any wireless and wired select or change a setting. communications cannot be assured. Third Your Uconnect system may also have Screen parties may unlawfully intercept information Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate. Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On Faceplate And and private communications without your Buttons On Touchscreen consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” Ú page 84. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134

134 MULTIMEDIA

For the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display and the When making a selection, press one button on NOTE: Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display the touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Availability of settings, setting names, and Once in the desired mode, press and release menu options can vary depending on vehicle Press the Apps button, then press the the preferred setting option until a check mark features, equipped Uconnect system, and the Settings button on the touchscreen to display appears next to the setting, showing that setting currently installed software. the menu setting screen. In this mode the has been selected. Once the setting is Uconnect system allows you to access complete, either press the Back Arrow button programmable features. on the touchscreen to return to the previous NOTE: menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the  All settings should be changed with the igni- Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the tion in the ON/RUN position. screen will allow you to toggle up or down  Only one area of the touchscreen may be through the available settings. selected at a time. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135

MULTIMEDIA 135

Language When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen language.

Setting Name Description This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The Language available languages are English, Français, and Español.

Display When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available settings are: 5

Setting Name Description This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system Display Mode automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display. This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are Display Brightness With Headlights ON on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness. This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are Display Brightness With Headlights OFF off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness. Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme. Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136

136 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Description This setting will allow you to set the Control Screen to turn off Control Screen Timeout automatically after five seconds or stay open until manually closed. Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.

Units When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument cluster display and navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:

Setting Name Description US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US. Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric. This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), Custom “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137

MULTIMEDIA 137

Voice When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.

Setting Name Description This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from Voice Response Length the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system. This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the command list. The “With Help” setting will Show Command List show the command list and provide a brief description of what the 5 command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.

Clock When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.

Setting Name Description This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The Sync Time With GPS system will control the time via the GPS location. This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will Time Format set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138

138 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Description This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be Set Time Hours off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the hours. This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must Set Time Minutes be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes. Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.

Camera When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.

Setting Name Description This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out ParkView Backup Camera Delay of reverse. Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the active backup camera guidelines on or off. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139

MULTIMEDIA 139

Safety/Assistance When the Safety/Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.

Setting Name Description This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle. 5 This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting Forward Collision Warning will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply brake pressure when a collision is detected. This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is ParkSense detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display. This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The Rear ParkSense Volume available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”. This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Blind Spot Alert Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140

140 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Description This setting will adjust the power steering modes. Setting options are Power Steering Default “Normal”, “Sport”, and “Comfort”. Hill Start Assist — If Equipped This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off. ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera guidelines on or off. This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out ParkView Backup Camera Delay of REVERSE. Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off. Tilt Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is place in REVERSE.

Mirrors & Wipers When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.

Setting Name Description This Setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE. Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse Setting options are “On” and “Off”. Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off. This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Headlights with Wipers Setting options are “On” and “Off”. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141

MULTIMEDIA 141

Lights When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights. NOTE: When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchased.

Setting Name Description This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the Headlight Off Delay headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”. This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the 5 Headlight Illumination On Approach headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”. Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off. This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the Flash Lights With Lock Lock button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”. Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142

142 MULTIMEDIA

Doors & Locks When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.

Setting Name Description This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from Auto Unlock On Exit the inside. This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the Flash Lights With Lock Lock button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”. This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is Sound Horn With Lock pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice. This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from Sound Horn With Remote Start the key fob. This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to open all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button. This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Passive Entry Enter-N-Go) on or off. This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob have been linked to the key fob. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143

MULTIMEDIA 143

Seats & Comfort When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.

Setting Name Description This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats (if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started. 5 Key Off Options When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.

Setting Name Description Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier. This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine Key Off Power Delay is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”. This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain Headlight Off Delay on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144

144 MULTIMEDIA

Audio When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.

Setting Name Description This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/ Balance/Fade back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location. This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the Equalizer audio. This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher Speed Adjusted Volume setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available setting are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off. This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through AUX Volume Offset the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”. This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected Auto Play device. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145

MULTIMEDIA 145

Phone/Bluetooth® When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.

Setting Name Description This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster Cluster Display. This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following Do Not Disturb settings are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message). Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices. 5 SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped NOTE: A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional. When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.

Setting Name Description This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune Tune Start to a music channel using one of the 12 presets. This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel Channel Skip list will display of the skipped channels. This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Subscription Information Travel Link is a separate subscription. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146

146 MULTIMEDIA

Restore Settings When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.

Setting Name Description This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory Restore Settings default. Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout. This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all Clear Personal Data personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.

System Information — If Equipped When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.

Setting Name Description Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147

MULTIMEDIA 147

NOTE: UCONNECT INTRODUCTION 1 — Radio Button Uconnect screen images are for illustration 2 — Media Button SYSTEM OVERVIEW purposes only and may not reflect exact soft- 3 — Climate Button ware for your vehicle. 4 — Apps Button 5 — Controls Button 6 — Phone Button 7 — Settings Button

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148

148 MULTIMEDIA

Feature Description Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Radio/Media Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 150. Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free Phone phone system Ú page 165. Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Settings Ú page 133. Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio station.

Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.

Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.

Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149

MULTIMEDIA 149

Feature Description Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated Controls seats and steering wheel. Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps. Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate Climate control functions Ú page 53.

DRAG & DROP MENU BAR 1. Press the Apps button to open the App SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION screen. The Uconnect features and services in the main Safety Guidelines menu bar are easily customized for your 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app 5 preference. Simply follow these steps: to replace an existing shortcut in the main WARNING! menu bar. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility NOTE: and assume all risks related to the use of the This feature is only available if the vehicle is in Uconnect features and applications in this PARK. vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150

150 MULTIMEDIA

Please read this manual carefully before using Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System  If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened the system. It contains instructions on how to  The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec- with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl use the system in a safe and effective manner. tronic device. Do not let young children use alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. the system. solvent manufacturer's precautions and Doing so can result in damage to the  Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play directions Ú page 348. touchscreen. your music or sound system at loud volumes. Please read and follow these safety Exercise caution when setting the volume on UCONNECT MODES precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury the system. or property damage. STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS  Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-  Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. ture away from the system. Besides damage The remote sound system controls are located If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, to the system, moisture can cause electric on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the park in a safe location and set the parking shocks as with any electronic device. three and nine o’clock positions. brake. NOTE:  Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Many features of this system are speed depen- Failure to do so may cause injury or damage dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to to the product. See an authorized dealer for use some of the touchscreen features while the repair. vehicle is in motion.  Ensure the volume level of the system is set Care And Maintenance to a level that still allows you to hear outside  Do not press the touchscreen with any hard traffic and emergency vehicles. or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could scratch the surface. Remote Sound System Controls  Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151

MULTIMEDIA 151

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch Radio Operation RADIO MODE with a push button in the center and controls Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for Radio Controls the volume and mode of the sound system. the next available station and pushing the Pushing the top of the rocker switch will bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of available station. the rocker switch will decrease the volume. The button located in the center of the left-hand Pushing the center button will make the radio control will tune to the next preset station that switch between the various modes available you have programmed in the radio presets. (AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.). Media Mode The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push button in the center. The function of the Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next left-hand control is different depending on track on the selected media (AUX/USB/ 5 which mode you are in. Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch The following describes the left-hand control goes to the beginning of the current track, or the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display operation in each mode: beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to 1 — Radio Bands play. Double pressing the bottom button switch 2 — Preset Radio Stations will skip to the previous track if it is after eight 3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations seconds into the current track. 4 — Status Bar 5 — Browse Button 6 — Seek Down 7 — Tune Button 8 — Seek Up 9 — Audio Settings 10 — Bottom Bar 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152

152 MULTIMEDIA

The radio is equipped with the following modes: Tune/Scroll Control Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down  AM Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to  FM or Seek Down button to advance the radio decrease the radio station frequency. Push the through the available stations or channels at a  SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped) Enter/Browse button to choose a selection. faster rate. The radio stops at the next available Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to Seek station or channel when the button on the enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner The Seek Up and Down functions are activated touchscreen is released. modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the double arrow buttons on the NOTE: by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio touchscreen to the right and left of the radio Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or Mode. station display or by pressing the left steering Seek Down button will scan the different Volume & On/Off Control wheel audio control button up or down. frequency bands at a slower rate. Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn Seek Up and Seek Down on and off the Uconnect system. Direct Tune Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Press the Tune button located at the bottom of The electronic volume control turns Down button to tune the radio to the next continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, the radio screen to directly tune to a desired available station or channel. During a Seek radio station or channel. without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off Up/Down function, if the radio reaches the control knob clockwise increases the volume, starting station after passing through the Press the available number button on the and counterclockwise decreases it. entire band two times, the radio will stop at the touchscreen to begin selecting a desired When the audio system is turned on, the sound station where it began. station. Once a number has been entered, any will be set at the same volume level as last numbers that are no longer possible (stations played. that cannot be reached) will become deactivated/grayed out. Mute Button Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the system. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153

MULTIMEDIA 153

Undo SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — bill at then-current rates until you call You can backspace an entry by pressing the If Equipped SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete Back button on the touchscreen. terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or GO www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Once the last digit of a station has been All fees and programming subject to change. entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to close, and the system will automatically tune to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous that station. USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with Radio Voice Commands coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or service is available throughout their satellite 5 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM® like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.) logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct Push the VR button on the steering wheel satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to This functionality is only available for radios and wait for the beep to say a command. See provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content. equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to some examples below. SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service. receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.  “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM” Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might  “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1” Manual kit for more information. have to change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold radio does not receive a signal in underground what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, separately after the trial included with the new parking garages or tunnels. push the VR button and say “Help”. The vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your system provides you with a list of commands. service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154

154 MULTIMEDIA

No Subscription When in Satellite Mode: Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver  The SXM button on the touchscreen is high- require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. lighted. When the Radio does not have the necessary  The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the subscription, the Radio is able to receive the top of the screen. Preview channel only. Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription  The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the center. To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, US residents visit siriusxm.com/  The Program Information is displayed at the getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112 bottom of the Channel Number. Canadian residents visit https://  The SiriusXM® function buttons are Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite www.siriusxm.ca/ or call: 1-888-539-7474. displayed below the Program Information. Radio NOTE: Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by 1 — Browse You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands. 2 — Replay 3 — Seek Down Button located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen. In addition to the tuning operation functions 4 — Direct Tune Button common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/ The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the 5 — Seek Up Button Weather button, and Favorite button functions SXM button on the touchscreen. 6 — Audio Settings Button are available in SiriusXM® Mode. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155

MULTIMEDIA 155

Replay The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost. Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time. You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.

Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or Play/Pause rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button 5 again on the touchscreen. Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen Rewind for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156

156 MULTIMEDIA

Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously Forward rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is release. Press the Live button on the touchscreen to Live Live resume the playing of live content. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157

MULTIMEDIA 157

Favorites Browse In SXM All Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen Press the All button on the Browse Screen. to activate the favorites menu, which will time When pressing the All button, the following out within 20 seconds in absence of user categories become available: interaction.  Channel List Press the Channel List to display You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can the X button. scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and The favorites feature enables you to set a Down arrows, located on the right side of the favorite artist or song that is currently playing. screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the Tune/Scroll knob. The radio then uses this information to alert you Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button when either the favorite artist or song is being  Genre List Press the Genre button on the 5 played at any time by any of the SiriusXM® 1 — All Button touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You Channels. 2 — Presets Button can select any desired Genre by pressing the 3 — Favorites Button The maximum number of favorites that can be Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with 4 — Game Zone Button stored in the Radio is 50. the content in the selected Genre. Presets — If Equipped Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump Press the Presets button (if equipped) located the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® at the left of the Browse screen. button on the touchscreen. Channel List. You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set This Screen contains many submenus. You can and Down arrows located at the right side of the a favorite song, press the Favorites button on exit submenus to return to a parent menu by screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song pressing the Back arrow. the Tune/Scroll knob as well. button on the touchscreen. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158

158 MULTIMEDIA

Preset Selection Remove Favorites Select Team — If Equipped A preset can be selected by pressing any of the Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the Press the Select Team button on the listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list. button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to teams within the league will appear, then you Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset. be deleted. can select a team by pressing the Deleting A Preset Alert Settings corresponding box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen. A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon corresponding preset. allows you to choose from a visual alert or Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the Favorites audible and visual alert when one of your screen. Press the Delete All button on the favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® touchscreen to delete all of the selections or Press the Favorites button on the Browse channels. press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to screen. Game Zone be deleted. The Favorites menu provides a means to edit Alert Settings the Favorites list and to configure the Alert Press the Game Zone button, located at the left Settings, along with providing a list of Channels of the Browse screen. This feature provides you Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the currently airing any of the items in the Favorites with the ability to select teams, edit the screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to list. selection, and set alerts. choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon On-Air start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the one or more of your selections is airing on any Up and Down arrows located at the right side of Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The of the SiriusXM® channels. the screen. Scrolling can also be done by On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well. airing any of the items in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio to that channel. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159

MULTIMEDIA 159

Tune Start The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, Scrolling Preset List Tune Start begins playing the current song from and are activated by pressing any of the Preset Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can the beginning when you tune to a music buttons, located at the top of the screen. scroll the preset list by rotation of the Tune/ channel using one of the 12 presets. This When you are on a station that you wish to save Scroll knob or by pressing the Up and Down feature occurs the first time the preset is as a preset, press and hold the numbered Arrow keys, located on the right of the screen. selected during that current song. button on the touchscreen for more than two Preset Selection From List seconds. Setting Presets A preset can be selected by pressing any of the The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse Radio Modes. button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the A total of six presets will appear on the screen. currently highlighted Preset. You can switch between the radio presets list by When selected, the radio tunes to the station 5 pressing the Arrow button located in the upper stored in the Presets. right of the radio touchscreen. Deleting Presets Preset Features — If Equipped A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse Browse In AM/FM screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen corresponding preset. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets provides a means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160

160 MULTIMEDIA

Return To Main Radio Screen 1 — Balance/Fade You can return to the Main Radio Screen by 2 — Equalizer pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button 3 — Speed Adjusted Volume when in the Browse Presets screen. 4 — Surround Sound Audio Settings 5 — Loudness Press the Audio button within the settings main 6 — AUX Volume Offset menu to activate the Audio Settings screen. 7 — Radio Off With Door The audio settings can also be accessed on the Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display button. You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the X button.

Audio Setting Description Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front Balance/Fade speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade. Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or Equalizer decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161

MULTIMEDIA 161

Audio Setting Description The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with Speed Adjusted Volume variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road noise. When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every Surround Sound — If Equipped direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system. Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves. The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This AUX Volume Offset alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar. 5 The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media Auto Play — If Equipped device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off. The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until Radio Off With Door — If Equipped the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162

162 MULTIMEDIA

MEDIA MODE the desired mode button on the touchscreen. Source Select/Select Source button and then USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped). Operating Media Mode sources available. When available, you can select the Browse button on the touchscreen to Bluetooth® Mode be given these options: Overview  Now Playing Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®  Artists device, containing music, to the Uconnect  Albums system.  Genres Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired to the Uconnect Phone to  Songs communicate with the Uconnect system.  Playlists To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® button on the left side of the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode  Folders touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select 1 — Repeat You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Source button (if equipped). 2 — Select Source Info button on the touchscreen for artist 3 — Track Time information on the current song playing. 4 — Shuffle Types of Media Modes 5 — Info 6 — Bluetooth® USB Mode 7 — Tracks Overview USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Audio Source Selection device into the USB Port, or by selecting the USB Once in Media Mode, press the Source or button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the Source Select button on the touchscreen and Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163

MULTIMEDIA 163

AUX Mode Controlling The Auxiliary Device In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Overview The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio; use the device release the Seek Down button on the AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio touchscreen to return to the beginning of the jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX controls instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or current selection, or return to the beginning of button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device under the Source Select button (if equipped). the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of the attached device. is within the first second of the current To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the selection. NOTE: Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you Browse insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the and begin to play. the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set touchscreen to display the browse window. In 5 too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for USB Mode, the left side of the browse window the radio unit to play the music on the device. displays a list of ways you can browse through the contents of the USB device. If supported by Seek Up /Seek Down the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist, In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired touchscreen for the next selection on the USB button on the touchscreen on the left side of the device. Press and release the Seek Down screen. The center of the browse window shows button on the touchscreen to return to the items and its sub-functions, which can be beginning of the current selection, or to return scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down to the beginning of the previous selection if the buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can USB device is within the first three seconds of also be used to scroll. the current selection. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164

164 MULTIMEDIA

Media Mode interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle Song List. The currently playing song is In USB Mode, press the Media button on the button on the touchscreen a second time to indicated by a red arrow and lines above and touchscreen to select the desired audio source: turn this feature off. below the song title. USB. Audio Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the while the pop-up is displayed will close the the touchscreen to select the desired audio Audio button Ú page 151. pop-up. source: Bluetooth®. Info Media Voice Commands In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info Uconnect offers connections via USB, touchscreen to select the desired audio source: button on the touchscreen to display the Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice AUX. current track information. Press the Info or X operation is only available for connected USB Repeat button on the touchscreen a second time to and AUX devices. In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the cancel this feature. Push the VR button located on the steering touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. Tracks wheel. After the beep, say one of the following The Repeat button on the touchscreen is In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks commands and follow the prompts to switch highlighted when active. The Radio will continue button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up your media source or choose an artist. to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as with the Song List. The song currently playing is  “Change source to Bluetooth®” the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button indicated by an arrow and lines above and  “Change source to AUX” again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue below the song title. When in the Tracks List to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to  “Change source to USB” as the repeat function is active. To cancel highlight a track (indicated by the line above  Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time. and below the track name) and then push the “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Shuffle Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track. Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical” In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device touchscreen to play the selections on the USB supports this feature, press the Tracks button device in random order to provide an on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165

MULTIMEDIA 165

Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the  Calling Back the last incoming call number NOTE: touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB (“Call Back”). Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging device. Your Voice Command must match via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work  Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre properly. Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed information is displayed. Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”). Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted PHONE MODE through your vehicle’s audio system; the system  Searching Contacts phone number (“Search will automatically mute your radio when using Overview for John Smith Mobile”). the Uconnect Phone. Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, Screen Activated Features For Uconnect customer support: hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.  Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen. It allows you to dial a phone number with your  US visit UconnectPhone.com or call mobile phone.  Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone- 877-855-8400 5 books displayed on the touchscreen. The feature supports the following:  Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call Voice Activated Features  Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so 800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call they are easily accessible on the Main Phone 800-387-9983  Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John screen. Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”). Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls  Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent between the system and your mobile phone as  Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your Call logs. you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to incoming SMS messages. mute the system's microphone for private  Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS  Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward conversation. Messages. one of 18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text messages.  Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly.  Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166

166 MULTIMEDIA

button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your You will be prompted for a specific command WARNING! signal to give a command. and then guided through the available options. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the Voice Command Button  Prior to giving a voice command, one must steering wheel. You have full responsibility wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen” and assume all risks related to the use of the The Voice Command button on your steering prompt or another prompt. Uconnect features and applications in this wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to are already in a call or want to make another  For certain operations, compound do so. Failure to do so may result in an call. commands can be used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then “John accident involving serious injury or death. The button on your steering wheel is also used Smith” and then “mobile”, the following to access the Voice Commands for the compound command can be said: “Call John The Phone feature is driven through your Uconnect Voice Command features if your Smith mobile.” Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. vehicle is equipped. Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the  Phone Operation For each feature explanation in this section, global standard that enables different only the compound command form of the electronic devices to connect to each other Operation voice command is given. You can also break without wires or a docking station. Ensure you the commands into parts and say each part Voice commands can be used to operate the phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and of the command when you are asked for it. Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to For example, you can use the compound structure. Voice commands are required after 10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed command form voice command “Search for most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or John Smith,” or you can break the general methods for how Voice Command paired) mobile phone and one audio device can compound command form into two voice works: be used with the system at a time. commands: “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John Smith.” Please remember, the Phone Button 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mobile”. Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in The Phone button on your steering wheel is a normal conversational tone, as if speaking used to get into the Phone Mode and make 2. Say the individual commands and allow the to someone sitting a few feet/meters away calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, system to guide you to complete the task. from you. view phonebook, etc. When you press the 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167

MULTIMEDIA 167

Natural Speech Help Command Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you Use this QR code to access your Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR) want to know your options at any prompt, say digital experience. engine. “Help” following the beep. Natural speech allows the user to speak To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, commands in phrases or complete sentences. simply push the Phone button (if active) on your The system filters out certain non-word steering wheel and say a command or say To begin using your Uconnect utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” “Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push of Phone, you must pair your compatible The system handles fill-in words such as “I the VR button or the Phone button. Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. Mobile would like to”. phone pairing is the process of establishing a Cancel Command The system handles multiple inputs in the same wireless connection between a cellular phone At any prompt, after the beep, you can say phrase or sentence such as “make a phone and the Uconnect system. 5 “Cancel” and you will be returned to the main call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in To complete the pairing process, you will need menu. the same phrase or sentence, the system to reference your mobile phone’s manual. identifies the topic or context and provides the You can also push the VR button or Phone Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do button on your steering wheel when the system mobile phone compatibility information. you want to call?” in the case where a phone is listening for a command and be returned to call was requested but the specific name was the main or previous menu. not recognized. The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system requires more information from the user, it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pushing the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168

168 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE: 4. Search for available devices on your 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. screen while the system is connecting.  You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to complete this procedure.  Press the Settings button on your mobile 7. When your mobile phone finds the phone. Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”  The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.  Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is 8. When prompted on the mobile phone, Follow the steps below to pair your phone: enabled. Once enabled, the mobile accept the connection request from 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN phone will begin to search for Bluetooth® Uconnect. position. connections. 9. When the pairing process has successfully 2. Press the Phone button. NOTE: completed, the system will prompt you to During the pairing procedure, you may receive a choose whether or not this is your favorite NOTE: pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the  If there are no phones currently the highest priority. This phone will take PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone. connected with the system, a pop-up will precedence over other paired phones within appear asking if you would like to pair a 5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to range and will connect to the Uconnect mobile phone. pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or system automatically when entering the Settings button from the Uconnect Phone vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one  This pop-up only appears when the user main screen. Bluetooth® audio device can be connected enters Phone Mode and no other to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is device(s) have previously been paired. If  Press the Paired Phones button. selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the the system has a phone previously  Search for available devices on your mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® paired, even if no phone is currently Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see screen, and the Uconnect system will connected with the system, this pop-up below). When prompted on the phone, reconnect to the Bluetooth® device. will not appear. select “Uconnect” and accept the 3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. connection request. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169

MULTIMEDIA 169

NOTE: Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process For phones which are not made a favorite, the screen while the system is connecting. 1. Press the Media button on the phone priority is determined by the order in touchscreen to begin. 7. When the pairing process has successfully which it was paired. The most recent phone completed, the system will prompt you to paired will have the higher priority. 2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”. choose whether or not this is your favorite NOTE: 3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device During the pairing procedure, you may receive a touchscreen to display the Paired Audio the highest priority. This device will take pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect Devices screen. precedence over other paired devices system to access your “messages” and within range. 4. Press the Add Device button on the “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync touchscreen. NOTE: your contacts with the Uconnect system. For devices which are not made a favorite, the NOTE: 5 You can also use the following VR command to device priority is determined by the order in If there is no device currently connected with bring up the Paired Phone screen from any which it was paired. The most recent device the system, a pop-up will appear. screen on the radio: paired will have the higher priority. 5. Search for available devices on your  “Show Paired Phones” You can also use a following VR command to Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When bring up a list of paired audio devices: NOTE: prompted on the device, confirm the PIN Software updates on your phone or the shown on the Uconnect screen.  “Show Paired Phones” Uconnect system may interfere with the Blue- tooth® connection. If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth® settings. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170

170 MULTIMEDIA

Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio 1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Audio Device After Pairing Device Settings button. Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to 2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio buttons. Device within range. If you need to choose a particular phone or audio device follow these 3. Press the Settings button located to the steps: right of the device name for a different phone or audio device than the currently 1. Press the Settings button on the connected device or press the preferred touchscreen. Connected Phone from the list. 2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources 4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. buttons. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display 5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete 1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone 3. Press to select the particular phone or the Device button on the touchscreen. particular audio device. A pop-up menu will 2 — Make Favorite appear; press “Connect Phone”. 3 — Delete Device/Phone 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171

MULTIMEDIA 171

Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite See the Uconnect website,  This downloaded phonebook cannot be UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones. edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. 1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources These can only be edited on the mobile  To call a name from a downloaded mobile screen, press the Settings button located phone. The changes are transferred and phonebook, follow the procedure in the to the right of the device name for a updated to Uconnect Phone on the next “Voice Command” in this section. different phone or audio device than the phone connection. currently connected device or press the  Automatic download and update of a phone- preferred “Connected Phone” from the list. book, if supported, begins as soon as the Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped 2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is There are two ways you can add an entry to your made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, favorites: 3. Press the Make Favorite button on the after you start the vehicle. touchscreen; you will see the chosen device 1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press  move to the top of the list. A maximum of 5,000 contact names with the Favorites button on the touchscreen, 5 four numbers per contact will be downloaded and then press one of the +Add Favorite 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings and updated every time a phone is Contact buttons that appears on the list. screen. connected to the Uconnect Phone. 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook  Depending on the maximum number of entries “Contacts” from the Phone main screen, Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped downloaded, there may be a short delay and then select the appropriate number. before the latest downloaded names can be If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone Press the Down Arrow button next to the used. Until then, if available, the previously selected number to display the option’s has the ability to download contact names and downloaded phonebook is available for use. number entries from the mobile phone’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with  Only the phonebook of the currently Favorites”. Phonebook Access Profile may support this connected mobile phone is accessible. NOTE: feature. Your mobile phone may receive a If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect remove an existing favorite. system to access your messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172

172 MULTIMEDIA

To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped Listed below are the phone options with Call Controls Uconnect: 1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” The touchscreen allows you to control the from the Phone main screen.  Redial following call features: 2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the  Dial by pressing in the number contact you want to remove from your  Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, favorites. This will bring up the options for Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or that Favorite contact. Call Back) 3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the  Favorites Favorite.  Mobile Phonebook Phone Call Features  Recent Call Log The following features can be accessed through Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display  SMS Message Viewer the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are 1 — Answer available and supported by Bluetooth® on your 2 — End mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile 3 — Mute/Unmute service plan provides three-way calling, this 4 — Transfer feature can be accessed through the Uconnect 5 — Join Calls Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173

MULTIMEDIA 173

Other phone call features include: These can be accessed by pressing the Recent  End Call Calls button on the phone main screen. You can also push the VR button on your  Hold/Unhold/Resume steering wheel and perform the above  Swap two active calls operation. For example, say “Show my incoming calls”. Key Pad Number Entry Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call 1. Press the Phone button. Currently In Progress 2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the When you receive a call on your mobile phone, touchscreen. the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system. Push the Phone button on the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed. 5 steering wheel, press the Answer button on the 1 — Answer Button touchscreen. 4. Use the numbered buttons on the 2 — Caller ID Box touchscreens to enter the number and You can also press the Caller ID box to place the press “Dial/Call”. current call on hold or answer the incoming call. Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call Recent Calls — If Equipped Currently In Progress You may browse a list of the most recent of each If a call is currently in progress and you have of the following call types: another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally  All Calls hear when using your mobile phone. Push the  Incoming Calls or Calls Received Phone button on the steering wheel, press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the  Outgoing Calls or Calls Made Caller ID box to place the current call on hold  Missed Calls and answer the incoming call. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174

174 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE: NOTE: Toggling Between Calls Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the system in the market today do not support touchscreen while typing a custom message. rejecting an incoming call when another call is While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer selected so you can still place a second call an incoming call or ignore it. without being interrupted by incoming calls. Do Not Disturb NOTE: With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts,  Reply with text message is not compatible allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and with iPhones®. hands on the wheel. For your convenience,  Auto reply with text message is only available Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display there is a counter display to keep track of your on phones that support Bluetooth® Message If two calls are in progress (one active and one missed calls and text messages while Do Not Access Profile (MAP). Disturb is active. on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold phone main screen. Only one call can be placed Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a on hold at a time. text message, a call, or both when declining an During an active call, press the Hold or Call On incoming call and send it to voicemail. Hold button on the Phone main screen. You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the active and held phone call. Automatic reply messages can be: Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In  “I am driving right now, I will get back to you Progress Join Calls shortly”. You can place a call on hold by pressing the When two calls are in progress (one active and Hold button on the Phone main screen, then one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button  Create a custom auto reply message up to dial a number from the keypad (if supported by on the Phone main screen to combine all calls 160 characters. your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or into a conference call. from the phonebooks. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175

MULTIMEDIA 175

Call Termination Advanced Phone Connectivity  Low Road Noise To end a call in progress, momentarily press the Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone  Smooth Road Surface End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be  Fully Closed Windows transferred from your mobile phone without the active call(s) will be terminated and if there  Dry Weather Conditions is a call on hold, it will become the new active terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call call. from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the WARNING! Redial Transfer button on the Phone main screen. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the Push the VR button and after the “Listening” Things You Should Know About Uconnect wheel. You have full responsibility and prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.” Phone assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this The Uconnect Phone will call the last number 5 Voice Command vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to that was dialed from your mobile phone. For the best performance: do so. Failure to do so may result in an Call Continuation accident involving serious injury or death.  Always wait for the beep before speaking Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle  Speak normally, without pausing, just as you Even though the system is designed for many ignition has been switched to OFF. would speak to a person sitting a few feet/ languages and accents, the system may not meters away from you always work for some. NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio  Ensure that no one other than you is NOTE: system until the phone becomes out of range speaking during a voice command period It is recommended that you do not store names in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting mended to press the Transfer button on the in motion. touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176

176 MULTIMEDIA

Number and name recognition rate is optimized Phone Voice Commands Voice Text Reply — If Equipped when the entries are not similar. You can say Making and answering hands-free phone calls Uconnect can announce incoming text “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook messages. Push the VR button or Phone Even though international dialing for most button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your button and say: number combinations is supported, some system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for shortcut dialing number combinations may not mobile phone compatibility and pairing 1. “Listen” to have the system read an be supported. instructions. incoming text message. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Audio Performance Push the Phone button and wait for the beep Uconnect system.) Audio quality is maximized under: to say a command. See some examples below: 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has   “Call John Smith” Low-To-Medium Blower Setting been read.   Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed “Dial 123 456 7890” Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the  Low Road Noise  “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone beep, repeat one of the predefined messag- number) es and follow the system prompts.  Smooth Road Surface  “Call back” (call previously answered  Fully Closed Windows incoming phone number) PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES  Dry Weather Conditions Did You Know: When providing a Voice Stuck in Yes. See you later.  Operation From The Driver's Seat Command, push the Phone button and say traffic. “Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it Start without Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and appears in your phonebook. When a contact No. I’ll be late. me. loudness to a large degree rely on the phone has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call and network, and not the Uconnect Phone. John Smith work”. Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177

MULTIMEDIA 177

Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading Bluetooth® Communication Link PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY incoming text messages only. For further RESPONSES Mobile phones may lose connection to the information on how to enable this feature on Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the Where are I will be 5 minutes Call me. compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is mode. yet? late. equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your Power-Up I’ll call you I need See you in 5 voice to send a text message. later. directions. When used with your Apple® iPhone® language change, you must wait at least 15 way. Ú 5 right now. minutes. connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri seconds prior to using the system page 348. I’m lost. Thanks. lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — more. Siri uses your natural language to NOTE: understand what you mean and responds back IF EQUIPPED Only use the numbering listed in the provided to confirm your requests. The system is table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose ANDROID AUTO™ designed to keep your eyes on the road and the message. your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have perform useful tasks. system, and your Android™ 5.0 or higher powered smartphone with a data plan, that the full implementation of the Message Access To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the allows you to project your smartphone and a Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio For details about MAP, visit steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, display. Android Auto™ brings you useful UconnectPhone.com. you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get information, and organizes it into simple cards directions, read text messages, and many other that appear just when they are needed. Android useful requests. Auto™ can be used with Google's best-in-class 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178

178 MULTIMEDIA

speech technology, the steering wheel controls, Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, Uconnect system, the following features can be and the radio display’s touchscreen to control utilized using your smartphone’s data plan: many of your apps. To use Android Auto™,  Google Maps™ for navigation perform the following procedure:  Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. NOTE: for music Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android  Hands-free calling and texting for communi- Auto™ features may or may not be available in cation every region and/or language. Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage  Various compatible apps NOTE: 1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the Maps Google Play store on your To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an Android™-powered smartphone. area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may Push and hold the Voice Recognition use cellular data and your cellular coverage is (VR) button on the steering wheel 2. Connect your Android™-powered shown in the upper right corner of the radio until the beep or tap the Microphone smartphone to one of the media USB ports screen. Data plan rates apply. icon to ask Google to take you to a in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app desired destination by voice. You can also touch was not downloaded, the first time you plug 3. Once the device is connected and the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access your device in the app begins to download. recognized, the Phone icon on the drag & other navigation apps. Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time drop menu bar changes to the Android While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™ you use the app. Auto™ icon. provides voice-guided: NOTE: NOTE:  Navigation Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately that came with your phone, as aftermarket once a compatible device is connected. You can  Live traffic information cables may not work. also launch it by pressing the Android Auto™  Lane guidance icon on the touchscreen. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179

MULTIMEDIA 179

For further information, refer to Communication Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https:// With Android Auto™ connected, push interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada). and hold the VR button on the steering technology through your vehicle’s voice For further information on the navigation wheel to activate voice recognition recognition system, and use your smartphone’s function, please refer to https:// specific to Android Auto™. This allows data plan to project your Android™-powered support.google.com/android or https:// you to send and reply to text messages, have smartphone and a number of its apps onto your support.google.com/androidauto/. incoming text messages read out loud, and place Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™ and receive hands-free calls. 5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports, Music using the factory-provided USB cable, and press Android Auto™ allows you to access, Apps the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your stream, and play your favorite music The Android Auto™ App displays all the “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on with apps like Google Play Music, compatible apps that are available to use with 5 iHeartRadio, Spotify, and any audio Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You the steering wheel, or press and hold the playable application. Using your smartphone’s must have the compatible app downloaded, “Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to data plan, you can stream endless music on the and you must be signed in to the app through activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes road. your mobile device for it to work with Android natural voice commands, to use a list of your Auto™. smartphone’s features: NOTE: Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/  Maps to see the latest list of available apps for up on your smartphone prior to using Android  Music Auto™ for them to work with Android Auto™. Android Auto™.  Phone NOTE: Android Auto™ Voice Command  Text Messages To see the track details for the music playing NOTE: through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect Feature availability depends on your carrier and  Additional Apps system’s media screen. mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android For further information, refer to https:// Auto™ features may or may not be available in support.google.com/androidauto. every region and/or language. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180

180 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE: To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are Requires compatible smartphone running using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and the very first connection only, and then use the Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. following procedure: APPLE CARPLAY® 1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use NOTE: your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen cable that came with your phone, as after- display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and market cables may not work. Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage your voice with Siri to get access to Apple 2. Once the device is connected and 1 — LTE Data Coverage Music®, Maps, Messages, and more. recognized, the Phone icon on the drag & 2 — Apple CarPlay® NOTE: drop menu bar changes to the Apple Feature availability depends on your carrier and CarPlay® Icon. NOTE: mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple NOTE: To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular CarPlay® features may or may not be available Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. data is turned on, and that you are in an area in every region and/or language. You can also launch it by pressing the Apple with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen. coverage is shown on the left side of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181

MULTIMEDIA 181

Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Music Apps Uconnect system, the following features can be Apple CarPlay® allows you to access The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan: all your artists, playlists, and music apps that are available to use, every time it is  Phone from iTunes® or any third party launched. You must have the compatible app application installed on your device. downloaded, and you must be signed in to the  Music Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also app through your mobile device for it to work  Messages use select third party audio apps including with Apple CarPlay®. music, news, sports, podcasts, and more.  Maps Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ Messages (US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/ Phone Push and hold the VR button on the carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold available apps for Apple CarPlay®. steering wheel to activate a Siri voice 5 the VR button on the steering wheel to recognition session. Apple CarPlay® Apple CarPlay® Voice Command activate a Siri voice recognition allows you to use Siri to send or reply session. You can also press and hold to text messages. Siri can also read incoming NOTE: the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start text messages, but drivers will not be able to Feature availability depends on your carrier and talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or read messages, as everything is done via voice. mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay® listen to voicemail as you normally would using features may not be available in every region Siri on your iPhone®. Maps and/or language. Push and hold the VR button on the NOTE: steering wheel until the beep or tap Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the the Microphone icon to ask Apple® steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR Siri to take you to a desired session, not a Siri session, and it will not func- destination by voice. You can also touch the tion with Apple CarPlay®. Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access Apple® Maps. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182

182 MULTIMEDIA

Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE hands-free text messages. However, another interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice CARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS device can also be paired to the Uconnect recognition system, and use your smartphone’s system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so data plan to project your iPhone® and a Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic the passenger can stream music. number of its apps onto your Uconnect Bluetooth® Pairing NOTE: touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be to one of the media USB ports, using the CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the launched from the front and center console factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the USB ports only. new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin setup required every time it is within range, if PERFORMANCE PAGES Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button Bluetooth® is turned on. on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Performance Pages is an application that Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate NOTE: provides a display for performance indicators, Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while as received from the instrument cluster, that to use a list of your iPhone’s® features: Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth® will help you gain familiarity with the capabilities connections to function. The connected device  Phone of your vehicle in real-time. is unavailable to other devices when connected To access the Performance Pages, press the  Music using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®. Apps button on the touchscreen then press the  Messages Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect Performance Pages button on the touchscreen. System — If Equipped Press the desired button on the touchscreen to  Maps — If Equipped It is possible to have multiple devices access that specific Performance Page.  Additional Apps — If Equipped connected to the Uconnect system. For NOTE: example, if using Android Auto™/Apple Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis- place hands-free phone calls or send tered in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements apply. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183

MULTIMEDIA 183

The Performance Pages include the following: WARNING!  Home Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Pages is intended for  Timers off-highway or off-road use only and should  Gauges not be done on any public roadways. It is recommended that these features be used in  G-Force a controlled environment and within the limits  Engine of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the Performance Pages must  Dyno never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s If a USB drive is installed in the media hub, press the Camera icon on the top right of the 5 safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, Screenshot Camera Button attentive, and skillful driver can prevent touchscreen when using Performance Pages. A accidents. screen shot of the page will be taken and saved onto the USB. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184

184 MULTIMEDIA

The following describes each feature and its 2. Select one the following options from the  Gauge: Intake Air Temp operation: menu:  Gauge: Engine Torque OME  Set Widget: Top Left H  Gauge: Engine Power  Set Widget: Top Right  Gauge: G-Force  Set Widget: Bottom Left  Gauge: Steering Angle  Set Widget: Bottom Right  Gauge: Current Gear 3. After selecting a widget location, select the  Gauge: Current Speed gauge to display:  Timer: 0–60 mph (0–100 km/h)  Gauge: Oil Temp  Timer: 0–100 mph (0–160 km/h)  Gauge: Oil Pressure  Timer: 60 ft (20 m)  Gauge: Coolant Temp  Timer: 330 ft (100 m)  Gauge: Battery Voltage  Timer: 1/8 Mile (200 m) Performance Pages — Home  Gauge: Trans Temp — If Equipped with an Automatic Transmission  Timer: 1000 ft (300 m) When Home is selected, a series of widgets (gauges) can be customized by the user. Follow  Gauge: Boost Pressure — If Equipped  Timer: 1/4 Mile (400 m) these steps to change a widget. Either press  Gauge: Air/Fuel Ratio — If Equipped  Timer: Brake Distance directly on the widget you want to change, or:  Gauge: I/C Coolant Temp — If Equipped  Timer: Reaction Time 1. Press the Settings button (gear icon) on the touchscreen to access the main menu for the widgets. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185

MULTIMEDIA 185

Historical Data 2. Towards the bottom of the screen, a NOTE: The Historical Data feature allows you to view checkbox will appear next to “Include Once the checkbox is selected, the bottom bar information about your vehicle such as the VIN, historical data in screenshot.” Click the box of the screen will be replaced with the historical miles on the odometer, longitude and latitude to signify that this feature will be on. data from your vehicle present at the time the coordinates, and more. screenshot icon was pressed. To activate the Historical Data feature on your touchscreen, follow these steps: 1. Select the Home page tab within Performance Pages. Then, press the settings icon (gear icon) in the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen. 5

Historical Data

1 — Outside Temperature 2 — Date 3 — Odometer Home Page Settings 4 — VIN Number 5 — Longitude And Latitude Coordinates 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186

186 MULTIMEDIA

3. To take a screenshot of the historical data, TIMERS When the Timers Page is selected, you will be make sure a USB device is plugged into the able to select the Drag or Accel & Braking tabs. vehicle. Next, click the Camera icon located The following will be displayed: in the top right corner of the touchscreen.  Recent The historical data image file will be saved to the USB drive. The most recent successful run of performance timers. If a run does not complete within the timers limit, or is aborted, the values shown will revert to the most recent valid run.  Last The last recorded successful run of performance timers. Performance Pages — Timers  Best The best recorded run of performance timers, except for braking data.

Historical Data Camera Icon 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187

MULTIMEDIA 187

 Save NOTE: Uconnect option will be grayed out or missing if Pressing the Save button will let you save the the vehicle does not have a valid Uconnect visible page, Recent/Last/Best. Any saved account associated with it. run over 10 will overwrite the last saved run for Uconnect system storage. The operation  Press the Cancel button to return to the of the Save feature is listed below: Timers page. NOTE: The tabs on the Timers page contain the timers Pressing the Camera icon in the upper right listed below: corner of the screen at any time will save a  Reaction Time screenshot of the screen currently being viewed to the connected USB device. Measures the driver's reaction time for 5 Performance Pages — Save launching the vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing light (behavior modeled  With a USB jump drive installed, press the after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in the USB button to save to the jump drive. instrument cluster display.  Press the Uconnect button to save the runs to the Owner web page. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188

188 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:  ⅛ Mile (200 m) mph  Brake from mph (km/h) Drag timers (RT, 60 ft [20 m], 330 ft [100 m], Displays the vehicle speed at the time ⅛ mile Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling 1/8 mile [200 m], 1000 ft [300 m], and (200 m) was reached. when the brake pedal is pressed. 1/4 mile [400 m]).  1000 ft (300 m) ET NOTE: NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers only displays Accel & Braking timers (0-60 mph [0-100 km/h], Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go "ready" when vehicle is traveling at greater than 0-100 mph [0-160 km/h], Brake from mph 1000 ft (300 m). 30 mph (48 km/h). [km/h], and Brake Distance ft [meters]).  ¼ Mile (400 m) ET  0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go GAUGES ¼ mile (400 m). Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).  ¼ Mile (400 m) mph  0-100 mph (0-160 km/h) Displays the speed the vehicle was at when ¼ mile (400 m) was reached. Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).  Brake Distance ft (meters)  60 ft (20 m) ET Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a complete stop. Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go 60 feet (20 m). NOTE:  330 ft (100 m) ET The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released or the parking brake Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go is engaged, before the vehicle comes to a Performance Pages — Gauges 330 feet (100 m). complete stop.  ⅛ Mile (200 m) ET Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go ⅛ mile (200 m). 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189

MULTIMEDIA 189

When selected, this screen displays the If a gauge is selected, the Gauge Detail View G-FORCE following values: page will appear on the screen. This page shows  Oil Temperature gauge values for the previous two minutes on the selected gauge. Shows the actual oil temperature. Pressing the Left and Right arrows will cycle  Oil Pressure through the details for each of the gauges. Shows the actual oil pressure. Pressing the minimize button above the graph will return to the gauge menu.  Coolant Temperature Shows the actual coolant temperature.  Battery Voltage 5 Shows actual battery voltage.  Trans Oil Temp — If Equipped with an Auto- G-Force matic Transmission When selected, this screen displays all four Shows actual transmission oil temperature. G-Force values as well as steering angle.  Boost Pressure — If Equipped When G-Force is selected, the following Shows actual boost pressure. features will be available:  Air Fuel Ratio — If Equipped  Vehicle Speed: Gauge Detail View Page Shows current air fuel ratio. Measures the current speed of the vehicle in  I/C Coolant Temp — If Equipped either mph or km/h, starting at zero with no maximum value. Shows actual I/C Coolant temperature.  Intake Air Temp Shows actual air intake temperature. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190

190 MULTIMEDIA

 Front G-Force: The friction circle display shows instantaneous When selected, this screen displays the G-Force as a highlight and previous G-Force as following values: Measures the peak braking force on the front dots within the circle. The system records of the vehicle.  Vehicle Speed previous G-Force for three minutes. If there are  Right G-Force: multiple samples at a given point, the color of Shows the actual vehicle speed. Measures the peak force on the right side of the dot will darken from blue to red. Vectors  Engine Power the vehicle. more frequent will show in red; infrequent vectors will show in blue. Shows the instantaneous power.  Left G-Force:  Engine Torque ENGINE Measures the peak force on the left side of Shows the instantaneous torque. the vehicle.  Oil Pressure (6.4L Only) — If Equipped  Rear G-Force: Shows the actual engine oil pressure. Measures the peak acceleration force on the rear of the vehicle.  Boost Pressure (6.2L Only) — If Equipped NOTE: Shows the actual boost pressure. Front, Right, Left, and Rear G-Forces are all peak  Gear (Automatic Transmission Only) values. These readings can be reset by clearing Shows the current (or pending) operating peak G-Force on the instrument cluster. gear of the vehicle.  Steering Wheel Angle Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to measure the degree of the Engine steering wheel relative to zero (straight ahead) reference angle. The zero degree reference angle measurement indicates a steering wheel straight ahead position. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191

MULTIMEDIA 191 DYNAMOMETER (DYNO) The following options can be selected: DODGE DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED  Pressing the STOP button will freeze the graph. Selecting Play will clear the graph and PERFORMANCE CONTROL — restart the process over. IF EQUIPPED  Press the + or – buttons to change the history Your vehicle may be equipped with a of the graph. The selectable options are “30”, Performance Control feature which allows for “60”, “90”, or “120” seconds. The graph will coordinating the operation of various vehicle expand or constrict depending on the setting systems depending upon the type of driving selected. behavior desired. The Performance Control feature is controlled through the Uconnect  Select the “Gear” display setting to turn the system and may be accessed by performing any graph gear markers on and off for automatic of the following: 5 transmission vehicles only.  Pushing the Super Track Pack button on the Dyno Page NOTE: instrument panel switch bank. The Gear on/off feature will only display if your The system will start drawing graphs for Power vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Trans-  Selecting “Performance Control” from the and Torque (top chart) and Engine Speed mission. “Apps” menu. (bottom chart). The graph will fill to the right side  Selecting “Performance Control” from within of the page (based on History time selected). the Performance Pages menu. Once the right side of the page is reached, the graph will scroll with the right side always being the most recent recorded sample. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192

192 MULTIMEDIA

You will be able to enable, disable, and Drive Mode Set-Up Pressing the Drive Mode Set-Up button on the customize the functionality of the Launch touchscreen within the Performance Control Control and Performance Control Set-Up screen indicates the real-time status of the features within Performance Control. various systems. Pressing the Sport Mode Descriptions of these features are provided Set-Up, Drag Mode Set-Up (1320 only), or below. To access information about the Default Mode Set-Up buttons on the functionality of these features through the touchscreen allows the driver to configure their Uconnect system, press the Info button on the individual performance control and see how touchscreen. those configurations affect the performance of the vehicle. NOTE: Dodge vehicles equipped with a 6.4L engine, NOTE: except for R/T Scat Pack 1320 6.4L non-wide- Not all of the options listed in this manual are body vehicles, will use SRT Drive Modes rather available on every vehicle. Below is a chart with all available Performance Control vehicle than the Dodge Performance Control Pages. Performance Control Set-Up Please refer to the following sections for further configurations. information on the SRT Drive Modes. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193

MULTIMEDIA 193

Available Mode Configurations Engine If Manual Transmission Engine/Transmission If Auto Transmission Steering X Paddle Shifters If Auto Transmission Traction Control X Suspension If Adaptive Suspension

Refer to the Sport and Default modes for their detailed operation. NOTE: 5 These settings will remain in effect when using the Launch Control feature. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194

194 MULTIMEDIA

Default Mode

Default Mode Set-Up Launch Control

Default Mode Launch Control This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that is designed to allow the driver to The vehicle will always start in Default Mode. WARNING! achieve quick, consistent vehicle acceleration in This mode is for typical driving conditions. While Launch Control is intended for off-highway or a straight line. Launch Control is a form of in Default Mode, the Engine, Transmission and off-road use only and should not be used on traction control that manages tire slip while Traction will operate in their Normal settings any public roadways. It is recommended that launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for and cannot be changed. The Steering Assist this feature be used in a controlled use during race events on a closed course where may be configured to “Normal”, “Sport”, or environment, and within the limits of the law. consistent quarter-mile and 0-to-60 times are “Comfort” by pressing the corresponding The capabilities of the vehicle as measured desired. The system is not intended to buttons on the touchscreen. The Paddle by the performance pages must never be compensate for lack of driver experience or Shifters (if equipped) may be enabled or exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, familiarity with the race track. Use of this feature disabled while in this mode. which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and may result in excess wheel slip outside this skillful driver can prevent accidents. system’s control resulting in an aborted launch. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195

MULTIMEDIA 195

NOTE: Sport Mode  Launch Control should not be used on public roads. Always check track conditions and the surrounding area.  Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles (805 km) of the vehicle’s life.  Launch Control should only be used when the engine and transmission are at operating temperature.  Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, 5 paved road surfaces only. Use on slippery or Sport Mode Set-Up loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle components and is not recommended. Sport Mode Possible Performance Control configurations are listed below with accompanying  Launch Control is not available in ESC Full Off Sport Mode is a configuration set-up for typical descriptions. The information contained in the mode. enthusiast driving. The Transmission and list below can also be accessed from within the Steering are both set to their Sport settings. The mode Set-Up menus. To access the information, steering wheel Paddle switches are enabled. press the Info button on the touchscreen from Traction Control defaults to Normal. Any of the mode Set-Up menu, and use the Left/Right these four settings may be changed to the arrows to toggle through available descriptions. driver’s preferences by pressing the buttons on The title for each system in the Set-Up menu the touchscreen. Push the Sport button on the can be pressed, which provides the descriptions instrument panel switch bank to put the vehicle for each function of that system. in Sport Mode and activate these settings. The customized settings will only be active when the Sport button is active. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196

196 MULTIMEDIA

Engine/Trans (If Equipped With Automatic Paddle Shifters — If Equipped With Automatic Traction Transmission) Transmission

Traction Control Engine/Trans Paddle – Automatic Transmission  SPORT  SPORT  ON Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to Press the Sport button on the touchscreen Press the On button on the touchscreen to turn off traction control and reduce stability for improved throttle response and modified enable steering wheel Paddle Shifters. control. shifting for an enhanced driving experience.  OFF  NORMAL  NORMAL Press the Off button on the touchscreen to Press the Normal button on the touchscreen Press the Normal button on the touchscreen disable steering wheel Paddle Shifters. to provide full traction control and full for a balance of throttle response, shift stability control. comfort and economy for normal driving. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197

MULTIMEDIA 197

Steering — If Equipped  NORMAL REGULATORY AND SAFETY Press the Normal button on the touchscreen INFORMATION to provide a balanced steering feel and USA/CANADA steering effort. This is also your vehicle’s preset steering setting. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation  COMFORT The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio Press the Comfort button on the touchscreen frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the to provide a lower steering effort. wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES human body. Under certain conditions, the mobile phone The internal wireless radio operates within 5 being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or guidelines found in radio frequency safety Steering noisy performance from your radio. This standards and recommendations, which reflect condition may be lessened or eliminated by the consensus of the scientific community.  SPORT relocating the mobile phone antenna. This The radio manufacturer believes the internal condition is not harmful to the radio. If your Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The radio performance does not satisfactorily provide an increased amount of steering feel, level of energy emitted is far less than the “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is requiring a higher amount of steering effort. electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless recommended that the radio volume be turned devices such as mobile phones. However, the down or off during mobile phone operation use of wireless radios may be restricted in some when not using Uconnect (if equipped). situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio Ú page 348. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198

198 SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES You also may experience the following normal characteristics when the ABS activates: WARNING! (Continued) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)  ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a colli- The ABS provides increased vehicle stability continue to hear for a short time after the stop) sion. Pumping makes the stopping distance and brake performance under most braking  Brake pedal pulsations longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal conditions. The system automatically prevents when you need to slow down or stop. wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during  A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of braking. the stop  The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure The ABS is designed to function with the it increase braking or steering efficiency that the ABS is working properly each time the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle is started and driven. During this Modification may result in degraded ABS vehicle brakes and tires or the traction self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound performance. afforded. as well as some related motor noises. WARNING!  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, The ABS is activated during braking when the including those resulting from excessive system detects one or more wheels are  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic speed in turns, following another vehicle beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice, equipment that may be susceptible to inter- too closely, or hydroplaning. snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose ference caused by improperly installed or  debris, or panic stops may increase the high output radio transmitting equipment. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle likelihood of the ABS activating. This interference can cause possible loss of must never be exploited in a reckless or anti-lock braking capability. Installation of dangerous manner that could jeopardize such equipment should be performed by the user’s safety or the safety of others. qualified professionals. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199

SAFETY 199

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction WARNING! Light Control System (TCS). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when control in various driving conditions. prevent the natural laws of physics from the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the may stay on for as long as four seconds. Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert Braking (RAB) and Rain Brake Support traction afforded by prevailing road If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes (RBS). conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock including those resulting from excessive portion of the brake system is not functioning Brake Assist System (BAS) speed in turns, driving on very slippery and that service is required. However, the The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of conventional brake system will continue to braking capability during emergency braking a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on. maneuvers. The system detects an emergency exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system braking situation by sensing the rate and which could jeopardize the user's safety or should be serviced as soon as possible to amount of brake application and then applies the safety of others. restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help 6 ABS Warning Light does not come on when the reduce braking distances. The BAS Brake System Warning Light complements the Anti-Lock Brake System ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results the light repaired as soon as possible. when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN in the best BAS assistance. To receive the mode and may stay on for as long as four ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) benefit of the system, you must apply seconds. SYSTEM continuous braking pressure during the If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). comes on while driving, it indicates that the Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless brake system is not functioning properly and system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), braking is no longer desired. Once the brake that immediate service is required. If the Brake Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. System Warning Light does not come on when Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control have the light repaired as soon as possible. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200

200 SAFETY

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) NOTE:  Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more EBD manages the distribution of the braking ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” than appropriate for the steering wheel position. mode (if equipped). For a complete explanation torque between the front and rear axles by  Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less of the available ESC modes, see Ú page 200. limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is than appropriate for the steering wheel position. done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear WARNING! ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake System Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. (ABS) before the front axle. conditions and driving conditions, influence When the actual path does not match the the chance that wheel lift or rollover may Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) intended path, ESC applies the brake of the occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the overs, especially those that involve leaving monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and oversteer or understeer condition. the roadway or striking objects or other the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines vehicles. The capabilities of an The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light that the rate of change of the steering wheel ERM-equipped vehicle must never be located in the instrument cluster will start to angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner flash as soon as the ESC system becomes potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the which could jeopardize the user's safety or active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction appropriate brake and may also reduce engine the safety of others. Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light begins to flash during wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift ESC enhances directional control and stability apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to due to other factors, such as road conditions, of the vehicle under various driving conditions. adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering road conditions. vehicles. of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201

SAFETY 201

ESC Operating Modes WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) Depending upon model and mode of operation,  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot  Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly the ESC system may have multiple operating prevent the natural laws of physics from maintain your vehicle, may change the modes. acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase handling characteristics of your vehicle, the traction afforded by prevailing road and may negatively affect the performance ESC On conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, of the ESC system. Changes to the steering This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. including those resulting from excessive system, suspension, braking system, tire Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system speed in turns, driving on very slippery type and size or wheel size may adversely will be in this mode. This mode should be used surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot affect ESC performance. Improperly for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC prevent accidents resulting from loss of inflated and unevenly worn tires may also modes should only be used for specific reasons vehicle control due to inappropriate driver degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle as noted in the following paragraphs. input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten- modification or poor vehicle maintenance tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC Partial Off dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped system can increase the risk of loss of This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes 6 vehicle must never be exploited in a reck- vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC less or dangerous manner which could injury and death. thresholds for activation, which allows for more jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of wheel spin than normally allowed. others. To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily (Continued) push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202

202 SAFETY

features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off” ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light WARNING! mode, push and hold the ESC OFF switch for five And ESC OFF Indicator Light When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the The ESC Activation/Malfunction functionality of ESC (except for the limited slip engine running. After five seconds, a chime will Indicator Light in the instrument feature described in the TCS section) has sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will cluster will come on when the ignition been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will is placed in the ON mode. It should go Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on out with the engine running. If the ESC mode, the engine power reduction feature of again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch. Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle on continuously with the engine running, a stability offered by the ESC system is WARNING! malfunction has been detected in the ESC reduced.  In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine system. If this light remains on after several torque reduction and stability features are ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven NOTE: disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater stability offered by the ESC system is  For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized unavailable. In an emergency evasive the push and release of the button will toggle dealer as soon as possible to have the problem maneuver, the ESC system will not engage the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be diagnosed and corrected. to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full required to return to "ESC On" mode. Off” mode is intended for off-highway or The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction  Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when off-road use only. and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.  The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also  If Equipped — "ESC Sport" and "ESC Track" cannot prevent the natural laws of physics flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC are ESC “Partial Off” mode(s). from acting on the vehicle, nor can it Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to increase the traction afforded by prevailing flash during acceleration, ease up on the Full Off – If Equipped road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accelerator and apply as little throttle as This mode is intended for off-highway or accidents, including those resulting from possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and excessive speed in turns, driving on very off-road use only and should not be used on any driving to the prevailing road conditions. public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203

SAFETY 203

The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates The following conditions must be met in order that the Electronic Stability Control for HSA to activate: WARNING! (ESC) is in a reduced mode.  The feature must be enabled. There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling NOTE:  The vehicle must be stopped. may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA  The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator  The parking brake must be off. Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come is not a substitute for active driving on momentarily each time the ignition is  The driver door must be closed. involvement. It is always the driver’s placed in the ON position. responsibility to be attentive to distance to  The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. other vehicles, people, and objects, and most  Each time the ignition is placed in the ON  The gear selection must match vehicle uphill importantly brake operation to ensure safe position, the ESC system will be on even if it direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in operation of the vehicle under all road was turned off previously. forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in conditions. Your complete attention is always  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking REVERSE gear). required while driving to maintain safe control sounds when it is active. This is normal; the of your vehicle. Failure to follow these 6  HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive warnings can result in a collision or serious forward gears. The system will not activate if following the maneuver that caused the ESC personal injury. the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For activation. vehicles equipped with a manual transmis- Hill Start Assist (HSA) sion, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain Disabling And Enabling HSA active. HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a This feature can be turned on or turned off. To complete stop while on an incline. If the driver change the current setting, proceed as follows: releases the brake while stopped on an incline, If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for Ú page 133. a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204

204 SAFETY

Towing With HSA buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in back while towing a trailer. speed. When RBS is active, there is no reduced modes. notification to the driver and no driver WARNING! interaction is required. AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS  If you use a trailer brake controller with your Ready Alert Braking (RAB) BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated RAB may reduce the time required to reach full IF EQUIPPED and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, braking during emergency braking situations. It there may not be enough brake pressure to anticipates when an emergency braking BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill situation may occur by monitoring how fast the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway when the brake pedal is released. In order to throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, avoid rolling down an incline while resuming Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot acceleration, manually activate the trailer system for a panic stop. zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal. Traction Control System (TCS) The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of  HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting your each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans- detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to mission in PARK. the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and  Failure to follow these warnings can result stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited in a collision or serious personal injury. Differential (BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel Rain Brake Support (RBS) spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a Rear Detection Zones RBS may improve braking performance in wet driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the conditions. It will periodically apply a small system will apply the brake of the spinning amount of brake pressure to remove any water wheel. This will allow more engine power to be 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205

SAFETY 205

When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside detection zones on both sides of the vehicle radar sensors are located must remain free of rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the when the vehicle speed reaches approximately snow, ice and dirt/road contamination so that system is operational. 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the the BSM system can function properly. Do not Automatic Transmission Vehicles driver of vehicles in these areas. block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located with foreign NOTE: The BSM system sensors operate when the objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.). vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE.  The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver Manual Transmission Vehicles about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any gear.  The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before 6 making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light Sensor Location remaining illuminated the entire time the The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in vehicle is in a forward gear. the detection zones by illuminating the BSM  The BSM system may experience dropouts warning light located in the outside mirrors in BSM Warning Light (blinking on and off) of the side mirror addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume Ú page 208. The BSM detection zone covers approximately warning indicator lamps when a motorcycle one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft or any small object remains at the side of the (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a couple of seconds). rearview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206

206 SAFETY

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.

Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching Overtaking Traffic The BSM system is designed not to issue an If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, relative speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h)) posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for occasionally the system may alert on such approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light objects. This is normal operation and your will be illuminated. If the difference in speed vehicle does not require service. between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not Side Monitoring illuminate. Entering From The Rear Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).

Overtaking/Passing 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207

SAFETY 207

The BSM system will not alert you of objects that Rear Cross Path — If Equipped When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, are traveling in the opposite direction of the RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing the driver is alerted using both the visual and Ú vehicle in adjacent lanes page 348. out of parking spaces where their vision of audible alerts, including reducing the radio oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed volume so that the alert can be better heard. slowly and cautiously out of the parking space NOTE: until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can RCP system will then have a clear view of the be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If cross traffic and, if an oncoming vehicle is the sensors are blocked by other structures or detected, alert the driver. vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver.

WARNING! Opposing Traffic Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid system. It is intended to be used 6 WARNING! to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an careful when backing up, even when using aid to help detect objects in the blind spot RCP. Always check carefully behind your zones. The BSM system is not designed to vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to RCP Detection Zones detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. check for pedestrians, animals, other Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving backing up. Failure to do so can result in glance over your shoulder, and use your turn toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum serious injury or death. signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to can result in serious injury or death. objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208

208 SAFETY

Modes Of Operation audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be NOTE: Blind Spot has three selectable modes of reduced so that the alert can be better heard. FCW monitors the information from the forward operation that are available in the Uconnect When the system is in RCP, the system shall looking sensors as well as the Electronic system. respond with both visual and audible alerts Stability Control (ESC) system, to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the Blind Spot Alert Lights Only when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio volume system determines that a forward collision is When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the is reduced so that the alert can be better heard. probable, the driver will be provided with BSM system will provide a visual alert in the audible and visual warnings. appropriate side view mirror based on a Blind Spot Alert Off detected object. However, when the system is When the BSM system is turned off there will be operating in RCP mode, the system will respond no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM with both visual and audible alerts when a or RCP systems. detected object is present. Whenever an NOTE: audible alert is requested, the radio volume is The BSM system will store the current operating reduced so that the alert can be better heard. mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime the vehicle is started the previously stored When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/ mode will be recalled and used. Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a ORWARD OLLISION ARNING FCW Message visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror F C W (FCW) based on a detected object. If the turn signal is OPERATION - IF EQUIPPED When the system determines a collision with then activated, and it corresponds to an alert FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, present on that side of the vehicle, an audible audible warnings and visual warnings (within the warning message will be deactivated Ú chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn the instrument cluster display) to warn the page 348. signal and detected object are present on the driver when it detects a potential frontal same side at the same time, both the visual and collision. The warnings are intended to provide audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209

SAFETY 209

NOTE: Turning FCW On Or Off Changing FCW Status  The minimum speed for FCW activation is NOTE: The FCW Sensitivity settings are programmable Ú 5 mph (10 km/h). The default status of FCW is on; this allows the through the Uconnect system page 133. system to warn you of a possible collision with  The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting in the vehicle in front of you. other than vehicles such as guard rails or the “On” setting. This allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in sign posts based on the course prediction. The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is front of you when you are farther away and it This is expected and is a part of normal FCW located in "Uconnect Settings" under "Safety applies limited braking. This gives you the most activation and functionality. And Driving Assistance". Forward Collision can reaction time to avoid a possible collision.  The FCW system is intended for on-road use be checked or unchecked. Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW When FCW is selected off, there will be an "FCW allows the system to warn you of a possible system should be deactivated to prevent OFF" icon that appears in the instrument cluster collision with the vehicle in front of you when unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. display. you are much closer. This setting provides less Changing the FCW status to off prevents the reaction time than the “Far” setting, which 6 WARNING! system from warning you of a possible collision allows for a more dynamic driving experience. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not with the vehicle in front of you. intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor NOTE: NOTE: can FCW detect every type of potential The FCW system’s default state is on. The FCW  The system will retain the last setting collision. The driver has the responsibility to system state is kept in memory from one igni- selected by the driver after ignition shut avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via tion cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, down. braking and steering. Failure to follow this it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted. warning could lead to serious injury or death. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210

210 SAFETY

 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such The tire pressure will vary with temperature by (TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must as overhead objects, ground reflections, about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This increase the tire pressure to the recommended objects not in the path of the vehicle, means that when the outside temperature cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS stationary objects that are far away, decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire Warning Light to turn off. The system will oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the pressure should always be set based on cold automatically update and the TPMS Warning same or higher rate of speed. inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire Light will turn off once the system receives the pressure after the vehicle has not been driven updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to  FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the for at least three hours, or driven less than be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph unavailable screens. 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this Service FCW Warning cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the information. maximum inflation pressure molded into the If the system turns off, and the instrument NOTE: tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase cluster display reads: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may as the vehicle is driven — this is normal and need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi  ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required there should be no adjustment for this (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard increased pressure.  Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning See Ú page 311 on how to properly inflate the This indicates there is an internal system fault. Light off. vehicle’s tires. Although the vehicle is still drivable under For example, your vehicle may have a normal conditions, have the system checked by The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire recommended cold (parked for more than three an authorized dealer. pressure if the tire pressure falls below the hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If low-pressure warning limit for any reason, IRE RESSURE ONITORING YSTEM the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and T P M S including low temperature effects and natural (TPMS) the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), pressure loss through the tire. a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low decrease the tire pressure to approximately will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based tire pressure as long as the condition exists, 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is on the vehicle recommended cold placard and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS pressure. or above the recommended cold placard Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning the tire pressure to rise to approximately 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211

SAFETY 211

27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light  The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS CAUTION! (Continued) maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi- Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- bility to maintain correct tire pressure using inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold sure always reinstall the valve stem cap. an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if placard pressure value Ú page 348. This will prevent moisture and dirt from underinflation has not reached the level to entering the valve stem, which could trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning CAUTION! damage the TPMS sensor. Light.  The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-  Seasonal temperature changes will affect inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres- NOTE: tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the sures and warning have been established for  The TPMS is not intended to replace normal actual tire pressure in the tire. the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Unde- tire care and maintenance or to provide Premium System sirable system operation or sensor damage warning of a tire failure or condition. may result when using replacement equip- The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ment that is not of the same size, type, and/  The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres- uses wireless technology with wheel rim or style. The TPMS sensor is not designed for sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire 6 use on aftermarket wheels and may unless your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each contribute to a poor overall system perfor- Alert (TFA) system. wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire mance or sensor damage. Customers are  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire pressure readings to the receiver module. encouraged to use OEM wheels to ensure causes the tire to overheat and can lead to proper TPMS feature operation. NOTE: tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel It is particularly important for you to check the  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle the Tire Pressure Monitoring System the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212

212 SAFETY

The TPMS consists of the following NOTE: components: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may  Receiver module need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard  Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning sensors Light off.  Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the instrument cluster Tire Pressure Monitoring Display  Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure condition (those shown in a different color in the Warnings instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s The TPMS Warning Light will recommended cold placard pressure inflation illuminate in the instrument cluster value as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. Low Tire Pressure Monitoring Display and a chime will sound when tire Once the system receives the updated tire pressure is low in one or more of the pressures, the system will automatically four active road tires. In addition, the update, the graphic display in the instrument instrument cluster will display an “Inflate to XX” cluster will change color back to the original message and a graphic showing the pressure color, and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off. values of each tire with the low tire pressure The vehicle may need to be driven for up to values shown in a different color. 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213

SAFETY 213

Service Tire Pressure System Warning  Using tire chains on the vehicle a “Service Tire Pressure System” message for five seconds and then display dashes If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure  Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS (- -) in place of the pressure value. Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will sensors flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a Vehicles With Compact Spare on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then display a "Service Tire Pressure System" size does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring remain on solid, and the instrument cluster message for a minimum of five seconds and System sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not will display a “Service Tire Pressure System” then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure monitor the pressure in the compact or message for five seconds and then display value to indicate which sensor is not being non-matching full size spare tire. dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. received. 2. If you install the compact or non-matching 5. Once you repair or replace the original road If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will full size spare tire in place of a road tire that tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If has a pressure below the low-pressure the compact spare or non-matching full the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS warning limit, upon the next ignition key size, the TPMS will update automatically. In 6 Warning Light will no longer flash, and the cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no on and a chime will sound. In addition, the off and the graphic in the instrument cluster longer display, and a pressure value will display graphic in the instrument cluster will still will display a new pressure value instead of in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur display a different color pressure value and dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is due to any of the following: an "Inflate to XX" message. below the low-pressure warning limit in any  Signal interference due to electronic devices of the four active road tires. The vehicle may or driving next to facilities emitting the same 3. After driving the vehicle for up to need to be driven for up to 20 minutes radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for TPMS to receive this information.  Accumulation of snow or ice around the 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In wheels or wheel housings addition, the instrument cluster will display 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214

214 SAFETY

TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument Please pay close attention to the information in can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel this section. It tells you how to use your restraint and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message and then display pressure system properly, to keep you and your tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, passengers as safe as possible. such as when installing winter wheel and tire values in place of the dashes. On the next assemblies on your vehicle. ignition cycle the "Service Tire Pressure System" Here are some simple steps you can take to message will no longer be displayed as long as minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four no system fault exists. wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires 1. Children 12 years old and under should not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a System (TPMS) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle vehicle with a rear seat. for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The Some of the most important safety features in If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will your vehicle are the restraint systems: seat, FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old and under to flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS on. The instrument cluster will display the ride in your vehicle. FEATURES “Service Tire Pressure System” message and 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the  Seat Belt Systems then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure vehicle seat belt properly must be secured values.  Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air in the appropriate child restraint or Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS Bags belt-positioning booster seat in a rear will no longer chime or display the “Service Tire seating position Ú page 232.  Pressure System” message in the instrument Child Restraints 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the Some of the safety features described in this rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the pressure values. section may be standard equipment on some front passenger seat, move the seat as far To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel models, or may be optional equipment on back as possible and use the proper child and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized restraint Ú page 232. equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the dealer. vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215

SAFETY 215

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder Research has shown that seat belts save lives, belt behind them or under their arm. WARNING! and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen 5. You should read the instructions provided front of an air bag. A deploying passenger when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat with your child restraint to make sure that front air bag can cause death or serious belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the you are using it properly. injury to a child 12 years or younger, risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the 6. All occupants should always wear their lap including a child in a rear-facing child vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be and shoulder belts properly. restraint. belted at all times.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in 7. The driver and front passenger seats should Vehicles Without Passenger Seating the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a be moved back as far as practical to allow Installed rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the front air bags room to inflate. the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do If your vehicle does not have a factory installed front passenger seat and/or rear passenger 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If not transport a rear-facing child restraint in seats, the features described in this section your vehicle has side air bags, and that vehicle. may not be available in your vehicle. deployment occurs, the side air bags will 6 inflate forcefully into the space between SEAT BELT SYSTEMS This vehicle has been designed to maximize occupants and the door and occupants total performance. The passenger seats may be could be injured. Buckle up even though you are an excellent deleted, which may affect the NVH (Noise, driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road Vibration, and Harshness) characteristics. As a 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to may be a poor driver and could cause a collision result, the vehicle may be louder overall. be modified to accommodate a disabled that includes you. This can happen far away Furthermore, the passenger seats and seat Ú person, see page 344 for customer from home or on your own street. belts systems are deleted. service contact information. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216

216 SAFETY

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) (BeltAlert)  If the passenger and/or rear seats have  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) been removed, do not ride in those areas. In and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, a collision, people riding in these areas are including the driver, should always wear BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the more likely to be seriously injured or killed. their seat belts whether or not an air bag is driver and outboard front seat passenger (if  If this vehicle was not factory equipped with also provided at their seating positions to equipped with outboard front passenger seat a passenger seat, NEVER attempt to install minimize the risk of severe injury or death BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The a passenger seat because the safety in the event of a crash. BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition systems, including the air bags and seat  All occupants, including the driver, should switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. belt, may not properly protect you. not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s Initial Indication seat if the head restraints are not in place  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition of their proper positions in order to mini- inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, people riding in this area are more likely to mize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the be seriously injured or killed. driver or outboard front seat passenger (if   Only ride in available seating positions Head restraints should never be adjusted equipped with outboard front passenger seat equipped with seat belt systems. Always while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch properly wear your seat belt. Failure to do vehicle with the head restraints improperly is first in the START or ON/RUN position the so could result in an increased risk of adjusted or removed could cause serious Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and serious injury or death in the event of an injury or death in the event of a collision. remain on until both outboard front seat belts accident. are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat (Continued) BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217

SAFETY 217

BeltAlert Warning Sequence The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated not active when the outboard front passenger during very sudden stops or collisions. This when the vehicle is moving above a specified seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard when an animal or other items are placed on to move freely with you under normal conditions. front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped the outboard front passenger seat or when the However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is reduce your risk of striking the inside of the (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is recommended that pets be restrained in the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. not active when the outboard front passenger rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning carriers that are secured by seat belts, and WARNING! sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt cargo is properly stowed.  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an more severe injuries in a collision. The air chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not bags work with your seat belt to restrain you has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light recommend deactivating BeltAlert. properly. In some collisions, the air bags will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat NOTE: The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat belt even though you have air bags. 6 If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver based on vehicle speed until the driver and or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped  In a collision, you and your passengers can occupied outboard front seat passenger seat with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is suffer much greater injuries if you are not belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will properly buckled up. You can strike the inte- occupants to buckle their seat belts. turn on and remain on until the driver and rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or Change of Status outboard front seat passenger seat belts are you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if buckled up properly. equipped with outboard front passenger seat Lap/Shoulder Belts BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning All seating positions in your vehicle are inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, sequence will begin until the seat belts are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. people riding in these areas are more likely buckled again. to be seriously injured or killed. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218

218 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)  Do not allow people to ride in any area of  A lap belt worn too high can increase the  A seat belt that is worn under your arm is your vehicle that is not equipped with seats risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt dangerous. Your body could strike the and seat belts. forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, bones, but across your abdomen. Always increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, worn under the arm can cause internal inju- possible and keep it snug. including the driver, should always wear ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder their seat belts whether or not an air bag is  A twisted seat belt may not protect you bones. Wear the seat belt over your also provided at their seating position to properly. In a collision, it could even cut into shoulder so that your strongest bones will minimize the risk of severe injury or death you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against take the force in a collision. in the event of a crash. your body, without twists. If you can’t  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it protect you from injury during a collision.  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could to an authorized dealer immediately and make your injuries in a collision much You are more likely to hit your head in a have it fixed. worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or collision if you do not wear your shoulder you could even slide out of the seat belt.  A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to Follow these instructions to wear your seat buckle will not protect you properly. The lap be used together. belt safely and to keep your passengers portion could ride too high on your body,  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in safe, too. possibly causing internal injuries. Always a collision and leave you with no protection. buckle your seat belt into the buckle Inspect the seat belt system periodically,  Two people should never be belted into a nearest you. single seat belt. People belted together can checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. crash into one another in a collision, hurting  A seat belt that is too loose will not protect Damaged parts must be replaced immedi- one another badly. Never use a lap/ you properly. In a sudden stop, you could ately. Do not disassemble or modify the shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one move too far forward, increasing the possi- seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies person, no matter what their size. bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. must be replaced after a collision. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219

SAFETY 219

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit you hear a “click.” back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the Positioning The Lap Belt seat belt to go around your lap. 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will 6 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To on the buckle. The seat belt will automat- loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the ically retract to its stowed position. If latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug necessary, slide the latch plate down the seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under webbing to allow the seat belt to retract Pulling Out The Latch Plate the seat belt in a collision. fully. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220

220 SAFETY

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted used only if the existing seat belt is not long lap/shoulder belt. enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be 1. Position the latch plate as close as removed. possible to the anchor point. WARNING! 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt  ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi- webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that cally required in order to properly fit the begins immediately above the latch plate. original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded distance between the front edge of the Seat Belts and Pregnant Women webbing. The folded webbing must enter Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the slot at the top of the latch plate. the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it  Using a Seat Belt Extender when not the event of an accident is reduced for the clears the folded webbing and the seat belt needed can increase the risk of serious mother and the unborn child if they are wearing is no longer twisted. injury or death in a collision. Only use the a seat belt. Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not Seat Belt Extender long enough and only use in the recom- Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, mended seating positions. Remove and hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest even when the webbing is fully extended and store the Seat Belt Extender when not and away from the neck. Never place the the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage needed. shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221

SAFETY 221

Seat Belt Pretensioner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors The front outboard seat belt system is equipped (ALR) with pretensioning devices that are designed to The seat belts in the passenger seating remove slack from the seat belt in the event of positions are equipped with a Switchable a collision. These devices may improve the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is performance of the seat belt by removing slack used to secure a child restraint system from the seat belt early in a collision. Ú page 243. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, The figure below illustrates the locking feature including those in child restraints. for each seating position. Rear Seat Delete — Only Front Passenger Seat NOTE: Available These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. 6 The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Vehicle With Rear Seating Energy Management Feature ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may Passenger Seat Delete — No Automatic Locking help further reduce the risk of injury in the event Retractor (ALR) Locations of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222

222 SAFETY

If the passenger seating position is equipped How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode WARNING! with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt  only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to Never place a rear-facing child restraint in and allow it to retract completely to disengage comfortably wrap around the occupant’s front of an air bag. A deploying passenger the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the front air bag can cause death or serious injury mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound to a child 12 years or younger, including a as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to child in a rear-facing child restraint. WARNING! retract completely in this case and then  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the  The seat belt assembly must be replaced if carefully pull out only the amount of webbing front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor necessary to comfortably wrap around the child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate does not have a rear seat, do not transport a is not working properly when checked into the buckle until you hear a "click." rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. according to the procedures in the Service In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is Manual. automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode  retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Failure to replace the seat belt assembly Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder could increase the risk of injury in colli- child restraint is installed in a seating position belt. sions. that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull  Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to 12 years old and under should always be downward until the entire seat belt is restrain occupants who are wearing the properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle extracted. seat belt or children who are using booster with a rear seat. seats. The locked mode is only used to 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat install rear-facing or forward-facing child belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. restraints that have a harness for This indicates the seat belt is now in the restraining the child. Automatic Locking Mode. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223

SAFETY 223

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS  Steering Wheel and Column Air Bag Warning Light (SRS)  Instrument Panel The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the readiness of the All passenger occupants within the vehicle must  Knee Impact Bolsters electronic parts of the air bag system be in a seat equipped with a Seat Belt System whenever the ignition switch is in the and Head Restraint for the safety of the  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch passenger.  Seat Belt Buckle Switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the If the front passenger and/or rear seats have  Supplemental Side Air Bags air bag system is not on and the air bags will not been removed do not ride in those areas. inflate.  Front and Side Impact Sensors Some of the safety features described in this The ORC contains a backup power supply section may be standard equipment on some  Seat Belt Pretensioners system that may deploy the air bag system even models, or may be optional equipment on if the battery loses power or it becomes  others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized Seat Track Position Sensors disconnected prior to deployment. dealer. NOTE: The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in 6 The air bag system must be ready to protect you Vehicles with front passenger seat deleted will the instrument panel for approximately four to in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller not be equipped with the Seat Belt Buckle eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and Switch, Seat Belt Pretensioner, Supplemental switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the interconnecting wiring associated with the Seat Mounted Side Airbag, and Seat Track Posi- self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn electrical Air Bag System Components. Your tion Sensors for the front passenger. off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part vehicle may be equipped with the following Air All passenger occupants within the vehicle must of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Bag System Components: be in a seat equipped with a Seat Belt System Light, either momentarily or continuously. A Air Bag System Components and Head Restraint for the safety of the single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) passenger.

 Air Bag Warning Light If the front passenger and/or rear seats have been removed do not ride in those areas. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224

224 SAFETY

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will Front Air Bags WARNING! illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder Light if a malfunction is detected that could Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your belts for both the driver and front passenger. affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also instrument panel could mean you won’t have The front air bags are a supplement to the seat record the nature of the malfunction. While the the air bag system to protect you in a belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is air bag system is designed to be maintenance collision. If the light does not come on as a mounted in the center of the steering wheel. free, if any of the following occurs, have an bulb check when the ignition is first turned The passenger front air bag is mounted in the authorized dealer service the air bag system on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it instrument panel, above the glove immediately. comes on as you drive, have an authorized compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on dealer service the air bag system “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers. during the four to eight seconds when the immediately. ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. Redundant Air Bag Warning Light  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect  The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- the Supplemental Restraint System tently or remains on while driving. (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning NOTE: Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay related gauges are not working, the Occupant on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be chime will sound to alert you that the Front Air Bags/Knee Impact Bolster Locations Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on disabled. In this condition the air bags may not 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an 2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or authorized dealer service the air bag system 3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster immediately. remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately Ú page 76. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225

SAFETY 225

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag WARNING! WARNING! Features  Being too close to the steering wheel or  No objects should be placed over or near The Advanced Front Air Bag system has instrument panel during front air bag the air bag on the instrument panel or multistage driver and front passenger air bags. deployment could cause serious injury, steering wheel because any such objects This system provides output appropriate to the including death. Air bags need room to could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli- severity and type of collision as determined by inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending sion severe enough to cause the air bag to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which your arms to reach the steering wheel or inflate. instrument panel. may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system  Do not put anything on or around the air  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in components. bag covers or attempt to open them manu- front of an air bag. A deploying passenger ally. You may damage the air bags and you front air bag can cause death or serious The first stage inflator is triggered immediately could be injured because the air bags may injury to a child 12 years or younger, during an impact that requires air bag no longer be functional. The protective including a child in a rear-facing child deployment. A low energy output is used in less covers for the air bag cushions are restraint. severe collisions. A higher energy output is used designed to open only when the air bags 6 for more severe collisions. are inflating.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that more severe injuries in a collision. The air the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do detects whether the driver or front passenger bags work with your seat belt to restrain you not transport a rear-facing child restraint in seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t that vehicle. may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts Front Air Bags. even though you have air bags. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226

226 SAFETY

Front Air Bag Operation When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Supplemental Side Air Bags Front Air Bags are designed to provide detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags additional protection by supplementing the seat signals the inflator units. A large quantity of (SABs) belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all The steering wheel hub trim cover and the frontal collisions, including some that may upper passenger side of the instrument panel Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags produce substantial vehicle damage — for separate and fold out of the way as the air bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the example, some pole collisions, truck inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS underrides, and angle offset collisions. inflate in less time than it takes to blink your AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats. On the other hand, depending on the type and eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate location of impact, front air bags may deploy in while helping to restrain the driver and front The SABs may help to reduce the risk of crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but passenger. occupant injury during certain side impacts, in that produce a severe initial deceleration. Knee Impact Bolsters addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the deceleration over time, vehicle speed and knees of the driver and front passenger, and damage by themselves are not good indicators position the front occupants for improved of whether or not an air bag should have interaction with the front air bags. deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in WARNING! all collisions, and also are needed to help keep  Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee you in position, away from an inflating air bag. impact bolsters in any way.  Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227

SAFETY 227

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. or complete ejection of vehicle occupants The inflating SAB deploys through the seat through side windows in certain side impact seam into the space between the occupant and events. the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure WARNING! occupants if they are not seated properly, or if  Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage items are positioned in the area where the SAB or other cargo up high enough to block the inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of deployment of the SABICs. The trim injury from a deploying air bag. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) covering above the side windows where the Label Location SABIC and its deployment path are located WARNING! should remain free from any obstructions. SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and Do not use accessory seat covers or place  other injuries to front and rear seat outboard In order for the SABICs to work as intended, objects between you and the Side Air Bags; do not install any accessory items in your occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to 6 the performance could be adversely affected vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not the injury reduction potential provided by the and/or objects could be pushed into you, add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. seat belts and body structure. causing serious injury. Do not add roof racks that require perma- The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side nent attachments (bolts or screws) for Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill (SABICs) edge of the headliner out of the way and covers into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. the window. The SABICs inflate with enough This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental force to injure occupants if they are not belted Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). and seated properly, or if items are positioned Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children (SABICs) are located above the side windows. are at an even greater risk of injury from a The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS deploying air bag. AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228

228 SAFETY

Side Impacts Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt WARNING! The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less  certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint time than it takes to blink your eyes. Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not Controller (ORC) determines whether the lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular WARNING! impact event is appropriate, based on the  Occupants, including children, who are up  Being too close to the Side Air Bags during severity and type of collision. The side impact against or very close to Side Air Bags can be deployment could cause you to be severely sensors aid the ORC in determining the seriously injured or killed. Occupants, injured or killed. appropriate response to impact events. The including children, should never lean on or  Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags sleep against the door, side windows, or lead to more severe injuries in a collision. on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts area where the side air bags inflate, even if The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In they are in an infant or child restraint. to restrain you properly. In some collisions, side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy  Seat belts (and child restraints where Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always independently; a left side impact deploys the appropriate) are necessary for your protec- wear your seat belt even though you have left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact tion in all collisions. They also help keep Side Air Bags. deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle you in position, away from an inflating Side damage by itself is not a good indicator of Air Bag. To get the best protection from the NOTE: whether or not Side Air Bags should have Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior deployed. seat belts properly and sit upright with their trim, but they will open during air bag deploy- The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side backs against the seats. Children must be ment. collisions, including some collisions at certain properly restrained in a child restraint or angles, or some side collisions that do not booster seat that is appropriate for the size impact the area of the passenger compartment. of the child. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229

SAFETY 229

Rollover Events Air Bag System Components NOTE: Vehicles with front passenger seat deleted will Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are NOTE: designed to activate in certain rollover events. not be equipped with the Seat Belt Buckle The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni- Switch, Seat Belt Pretensioner, Supplemental The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) tors the internal circuits and interconnecting determines whether deployment in a particular Seat Mounted Side Airbag, and Seat Track Posi- wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System tion Sensors for the front passenger. rollover event is appropriate, based on the Components listed below: severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by If A Deployment Occurs itself is not a good indicator of whether or not  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The front air bags are designed to deflate Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners  Air Bag Warning Light immediately after deployment. should have deployed. The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners  Steering Wheel and Column NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover  Instrument Panel sensing system determines if a rollover event collisions. This does not mean something is may be in progress and whether deployment is  Knee Impact Bolsters wrong with the air bag system. 6 appropriate. In the event the vehicle  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags If you do have a collision which deploys the air experiences a rollover or near rollover event, bags, any or all of the following may occur: and deployment is appropriate, the rollover  Seat Belt Buckle Switch sensing system will deploy the side air bags and  The air bag material may sometimes cause  Supplemental Side Air Bags seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu- vehicle.  Front and Side Impact Sensors pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial  Seat Belt Pretensioners those you might get sliding along a carpet or or complete ejection of vehicle occupants gymnasium floor. They are not caused by  Seat Track Position Sensors through side windows in certain rollover or side contact with chemicals. They are not perma- impact events. nent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230

230 SAFETY

 As the air bags deflate, you may see some NOTE: Your vehicle may also be designed to perform smoke-like particles. The particles are a any of these other functions in response to the  Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte- normal by-product of the process that gener- Enhanced Accident Response System: ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla- rior trim, but they will open during air bag  Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the tion. These airborne particles may irritate the deployment. HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula- skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or  After any collision, the vehicle should be tion Door eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. taken to an authorized dealer immediately. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.  Cut off battery power to the: If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If Enhanced Accident Response System  Engine these particles settle on your clothing, follow In the event of an impact, if the communication the garment manufacturer’s instructions for network remains intact, and the power remains  Electric Motor (if equipped) cleaning. intact, depending on the nature of the event,  Electric power steering Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will  Brake booster deployed. If you are involved in another determine whether to have the Enhanced collision, the air bags will not be in place to Accident Response System perform the  Electric park brake protect you. following functions:  Automatic transmission gear selector  Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped). WARNING!  Horn  Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if Deployed air bags and seat belt equipped).  Front wiper pretensioners cannot protect you in another  Headlamp washer pump collision. Have the air bags, seat belt  Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor power. NOTE: assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer  Turn on the interior lights, which remain on After an accident, remember to cycle the igni- immediately. Also, have the Occupant as long as the battery has power or for tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and Restraint Controller System serviced as well. 15 minutes from the intervention of the remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid Enhanced Accident Response System. draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on  Unlock the power door locks. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231

SAFETY 231

the ground near the engine compartment and Maintaining Your Air Bag System fuel tank before resetting the system and WARNING! (Continued) starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or WARNING!  Do not attempt to modify any part of your damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.  Modifications to any part of the air bag air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci- headlights) after an accident, reset the system system could cause it to fail when you need dentally or may not function properly if by following the procedure described below. If it. You could be injured if the air bag system modifications are made. Take your vehicle you have any doubt, contact an authorized is not there to protect you. Do not modify to an authorized dealer for any air bag dealer. the components or wiring, including adding system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be Enhanced Accident Response System any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper serviced in any way (including removal or Reset Procedure passenger side of the instrument panel. Do loosening/tightening of seat attachment In order to reset the Enhanced Accident not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized Response System functions after an event, the body structure, or add aftermarket side dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat ignition switch must be changed from ignition steps or running boards. accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons 6 START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully  It is dangerous to try to repair any part of check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine with disabilities, contact an authorized the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell dealer. compartment and on the ground near the anyone who works on your vehicle that it engine compartment and fuel tank before has an air bag system. resetting the system and starting the engine. (Continued) After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the Enhanced Accident Response System reset. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232

232 SAFETY

Event Data Recorder (EDR) NOTE: CHILD RESTRAINTS This vehicle is equipped with an event data EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is at all times, including babies and children. Every to record, in certain crash or near crash-like recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, state in the United States, and every Canadian situations, such as an air bag deployment or province, requires that small children ride in hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce- proper restraint systems. This is the law, and understanding how a vehicle’s systems you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. performed. The EDR is designed to record data ment, could combine the EDR data with the type related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems of personally identifying data routinely acquired Children 12 years or younger should ride for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds during a crash investigation. properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to To read data recorded by an EDR, special According to crash statistics, children are safer record such data as: equipment is required, and access to the when properly restrained in the rear seats  How various systems in your vehicle were vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the rather than in the front. operating; vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, law enforcement, that have the special FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow  Whether or not the driver and passenger equipment, can read the information if they children 12 years old and under to ride in your safety belts were buckled/fastened; have access to the vehicle or the EDR. vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your  How far (if at all) the driver was depressing vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, positions.  How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233

SAFETY 233

There are different sizes and types of restraints NOTE: WARNING! for children from newborn size to the child  For additional information, refer to http:// In a collision, an unrestrained child can almost large enough for an adult safety belt. www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or become a projectile inside the vehicle. The Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to call: 1–888–327–4236 force required to hold even an infant on your make sure you have the correct seat for your lap could become so great that you could not child. Carefully read and follow all the  Canadian residents should refer to Transport hold the child, no matter how strong you are. instructions and warnings in the child restraint Canada’s website for additional information: The child and others could be badly injured or Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/ killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should to the child restraint. child-car-seat-safety.html be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. 6 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234

234 SAFETY

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight limits Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the of their child restraint vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Small Children have outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the rear-facing child restraint vehicle Children who have outgrown their forward-facing Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their vehicle booster seat

NOTE: Infant And Child Restraints the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, Safety experts recommend that children ride used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a children 12 years old and under to ride in your old or until they reach either the height or higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. than infant carriers do, so they can be used vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their positions. If you must install a forward facing rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child infant carrier but are still less than at least two child restraint in the front passenger seat, then seats. years old. Children should remain rear-facing you must use the seat belt system to secure the until they reach the highest weight or height restraint. A top tether strap extension may be The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the allowed by their convertible child seat. needed to reach the tether anchor on the rear vehicle. It is recommended for children from shelf directly behind the passenger seat. birth until they reach the weight or height limit of 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235

SAFETY 235

Children who are two years old or who have WARNING! outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat WARNING!  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.  Improper installation can lead to failure of front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Forward-facing child seats and convertible child an infant or child restraint. It could come front air bag can cause death or serious injury seats used in the forward-facing direction are loose in a collision. The child could be badly to a child 12 years or younger, including a for children who are over two years old or who injured or killed. Follow the child restraint child in a rear-facing child restraint. have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a Children should remain in a forward-facing child  After a child restraint is installed in the rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If seat with a harness for as long as possible, up vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do to the highest weight or height allowed by the forward or rearward because it can loosen not transport a rear-facing child restraint in child seat. the child restraint attachments. Remove that vehicle. All children whose weight or height is above the the child restraint before adjusting the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat 6 Older Children And Child Restraints a belt-positioning booster seat until the has been adjusted, reinstall the child vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child restraint. NOTE: cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s  When your child restraint is not in use, If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, seat cushion while the child’s back is against secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the children 12 years old and under to ride in your booster seat. The child and belt-positioning vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these belt. the occupants or seatbacks and cause positions. If you must install a forward facing serious personal injury. child restraint in the front passenger seat, then you must use the seat belt system to secure the restraint. A top tether strap extension may be needed to reach the tether anchor on the rear shelf directly behind the passenger seat. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236

236 SAFETY

Children Too Large For Booster Seats 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between the neck and arm? WARNING! NOTE: Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, touching the child’s thighs and not the FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow the shoulder belt will not protect a child stomach? children 12 years old and under to ride in your properly, which may result in serious injury or vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the death. A child must always wear both the lap vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these whole trip? and shoulder portions of the seat belt positions. correctly. Children who are large enough to wear the If the answer to any of these questions was shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster long enough to bend over the front of the seat seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/ WARNING! when their back is against the seatback, should shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically If the rear or front passenger seats are not use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child 5-step test to decide whether the child can use A child’s squirming or slouching can move the restraint in these positions. the vehicle’s seat belt alone: belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the 1. Can the child sit all the way back against center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to the back of the vehicle seat? position the seat belt on the child correctly. 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way back? 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237

SAFETY 237

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these positions.

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Combined Weight of LATCH – Lower Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Restraint Anchors Only Tether Anchor Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Restraint Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X 6 Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Restraint Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238

238 SAFETY

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some NEVER install a child restraint in these (LATCH) Restraint System seating positions may have a top tether positions. If you must install a forward facing anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these child restraint in the front passenger seat, then seating positions, the seat belt must be used you must use the seat belt system to secure the with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. A top tether strap extension may be restraint. Please see the following table for needed to reach the tether anchor on the rear more information. shelf directly behind the passenger seat. LATCH Positions For Installing Child WARNING! Restraints In This Vehicle  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in LATCH Label WARNING! front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious If the rear or front passenger seats are not Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint injury to a child 12 years or younger, present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child anchorage system called LATCH, which stands including a child in a rear-facing child restraint in these positions. for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The restraint. LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There Vehicles Without Rear Seating Installed the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a are two lower anchorages located at the back of If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the seat cushion where it meets the seatback passenger seat, your vehicle is not equipped the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do and one top tether anchorage located behind with LATCH anchorages. If your vehicle is not not transport a rear-facing child restraint in the seating position. These anchorages are equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC that vehicle. used to install LATCH-equipped child seats recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your vehicle, 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239

SAFETY 239

Vehicle With Rear Seating — LATCH Positions Rear Seat Delete — No LATCH Positions In This Vehicle Passenger Seats Deleted — No LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 6 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240

240 SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt of the child restraint) for using the LATCH 65 lbs (29.5 kg) and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system anchorage system to attach the child restraint? once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be or forward-facing child restraint. used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does Can two child restraints be attached using a not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, No common lower LATCH anchorage? use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes manufacturer also allows contact. See your back of the front passenger seat? child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Can the rear head restraints be removed? No 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241

SAFETY 241

Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap WARNING! WARNING! on each side. Each will have a hook or If the rear or front passenger seats are not If the rear or front passenger seats are not connector to attach to the lower anchorage and present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child a way to tighten the connection to the restraint in these positions. restraint in these positions. anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap The lower anchorages are round bars There are tether strap anchorages will have a hook at the end to attach to the top that are found at the rear of the seat behind each rear seating position tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap cushion where it meets the seatback, located in the panel between the rear after it is attached to the anchorage. below the anchorage symbols on the seatback and the rear window. They seatback. They are just visible when you lean are found under a plastic cover with the tether Center Seat LATCH into the rear seat to install the child restraint. anchorage symbol on it. If a child restraint installed in the center You will easily feel them if you run your finger position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle 6 along the gap between the seatback and seat for the outboard position, do not use that cushion. outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position.

WARNING! Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. For Tether Strap Anchorages typical installation instructions, see Ú page 242. LATCH Anchorages 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242

242 SAFETY

Always follow the directions of the child 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the installing a child restraint using the LATCH restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint to the lower anchorages in system, buckle the seat belt behind the child child restraint. Not all child restraint systems the selected seating position. restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the will be installed as described here. buckled seat belt interferes with the child 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, restraint installation, instead of buckling it To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child connect it to the top tether anchorage. See behind the child restraint, route the seat belt Restraint Ú page 246 for directions to attach a tether through the child restraint belt path and then anchor. If the selected seating position has a buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the child restraint rearward and downward into toys and that they should not play with them. Ú instructions below. See page 243 to check the seat. Remove slack in the straps what type of seat belt each seating position has. according to the child restraint WARNING! 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps manufacturer’s instructions.  Improper installation of a child restraint to and on the tether strap of the child seat so 6. Test that the child restraint is installed the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of that you can more easily attach the hooks tightly by pulling back and forth on the child the restraint. The child could be badly or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. seat at the belt path. It should not move injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any 2. Place the child seat between the lower installing an infant or child restraint. anchorages for that seating position. If the direction.  second row seat can be reclined, you may Child restraint anchorages are designed to How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR recline the seat and/or raise the head withstand only those loads imposed by restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If (ALR) Seat Belt: correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult the rear seat can be moved forward and When using the LATCH attaching system to seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts items or equipment to the vehicle. move it to its rear-most position to make that are not being used by other occupants or room for the child seat. You may also move being used to secure child restraints. An unused the front seat forward to allow more room belt could injure a child if they play with it and for the child seat. accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243

SAFETY 243

Installing Child Restraints Using The by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor WARNING! (Continued) Vehicle Seat Belt and then letting the webbing retract back into  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a NOTE: the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do Locking Mode” description on Ú page 221 for children 12 years old and under to ride in your not transport a rear-facing child restraint in additional information on ALR. vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your that vehicle. vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these Please see the table below and the following positions. sections for more information. WARNING! Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap  Improper installation or failure to properly Child Restraints In This Vehicle secure a child restraint can lead to failure belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. NOTE: of the restraint. The child could be badly If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, injured or killed. 6 WARNING! FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s children 12 years old and under to ride in your front of an air bag. A deploying passenger directions exactly when installing an infant vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your front air bag can cause death or serious injury or child restraint. to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. The seat belts in the passenger seating (Continued) positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244

244 SAFETY

vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these positions.

Rear Seat Delete — Only Front Passenger Seat Passenger Seat Delete — No Automatic Locking Available Retractor (ALR) Locations

Vehicle With Rear Seating ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245

SAFETY 245

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s Always use the tether anchor when weight + weight of the child using the seat belt to install a restraint) for using the Tether Weight limit of the Child Restraint forward facing child restraint, up to Anchor with the seat belt to attach the recommended weight limit of a forward facing child restraint? the child restraint. Contact between the front Can the rear-facing child restraint passenger seat and the child touch the back of the front Yes restraint is allowed, if the child passenger seat? restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Can the rear head restraints be No removed? 6 Can the buckle stalk be twisted to Do not twist the buckle stalk in a tighten the seat belt against the No seating position with an ALR belt path of the child restraint? retractor. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246

246 SAFETY

Installing A Child Restraint With A 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor the retractor to pass it through the belt path and the seating position has a top tether (ALR): of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt anchorage, connect the tether strap to the webbing in the belt path. anchorage and tighten the tether strap. For Child restraint systems are designed to be directions to attach a tether anchor, see secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you Ú page 246. belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. hear a “click.” 9. Test that the child restraint is installed 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion WARNING! tightly by pulling back and forth on the child tight against the child seat.  Improper installation or failure to properly seat at the belt path. It should not move secure a child restraint can lead to failure 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any of the restraint. The child could be badly shoulder part of the belt until you have direction. injured or killed. pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s back into the retractor. As the webbing check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if directions exactly when installing an infant retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This necessary. or child restraint. means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Locking mode. Tether Anchorage: 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. If the second row seat can 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. WARNING! be reclined, you may recline the seat and/ If it is locked, you should not be able to pull or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to out any webbing. If the retractor is not If the rear or front passenger seats are not get a better fit. If the rear seat can be locked, repeat step 5. present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child moved forward and rearward in the restraint in these positions. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to vehicle, you may wish to move it to its tighten the lap portion around the child rear-most position to make room for the restraint while you push the child restraint child seat. You may also move the front rearward and downward into the vehicle seat forward to allow more room for the seat. child seat. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247

SAFETY 247

1. Look behind the seating position where WARNING! you plan to install the child restraint to find Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing the tether anchorage. You may need to car seat to any location in front of the car move the seat forward to provide better seat, including the seat frame or a tether access to the tether anchorage. If there is anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a no top tether anchorage for that seating rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage position, move the child restraint to that is approved for that seating position, another position in the vehicle if one is located behind the top of the vehicle seat. For available. the location of approved tether anchorages in 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor Tether Strap Mounting your vehicle, see Ú page 238. directly behind the seat where you are 2 — Cover placing the child restraint. 3 — Attaching Strap 3. Route the tether strap to provide the most A — Tether Strap Hook direct path for the strap between the anchor B — Tether Anchor 6 and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraints, raise the head restraint, and restraint to the top tether anchorage as where possible, route the tether strap under shown in the diagram. the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head 5. Remove slack in the tether strap according restraint and pass the tether strap around to the child restraint manufacturer’s the outboard side of the head restraint. instructions. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248

248 SAFETY NOTE: SAFETY TIPS TRANSPORTING PETS If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS children 12 years old and under to ride in your your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your about and possibly injured, or injure a CARGO AREA. vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these passenger during panic braking or in a collision. positions. If you must install a forward facing Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if WARNING! child restraint in the front passenger seat, then equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that you must use the seat belt system to secure the  Do not leave children or animals inside are secured by seat belts. restraint. A top tether strap extension may be parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior AFETY HECKS OU HOULD AKE needed to reach the tether anchor on the rear heat build-up may cause serious injury or S C Y S M shelf directly behind the passenger seat. death. INSIDE THE VEHICLE  It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo Seat Belts WARNING! area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a Inspect the seat belt system periodically, collision, people riding in these areas are  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. more likely to be seriously injured or killed. lead to increased head motion and Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. possible injury to the child. Use only the  Do not allow people to ride in any area of Do not disassemble or modify the system. anchorage position directly behind the child your vehicle that is not equipped with seats Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced seat to secure a child restraint top tether and seat belts. after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must strap.  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat be replaced after a collision if they have been  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear and using a seat belt properly. damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, seat, make sure the tether strap does not etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt slip into the opening between the seat- or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. backs as you remove slack in the strap. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249

SAFETY 249

Air Bag Warning Light fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch WARNING! (Continued) The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle  ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your to eight seconds as a bulb check when the in other ways. vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN cannot be properly attached and secured to mode. If the light is either not on during starting, WARNING! your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be stays on, or turns on while driving, have the replaced, only use a FCA approved floor An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or system inspected at an authorized dealer as mat for the specific make, model, and year stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light of your vehicle. will illuminate with a single chime when a fault fasteners may cause your floor mat to with the Air Bag System has been detected. It interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To driver’s side floor area. To check for inter- comes on intermittently or remains on while prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: ference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accel- driving, have an authorized dealer service the  ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat vehicle immediately Ú page 214. erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT present) to check for interference. If your 6 Defroster install your floor mat upside down or turn floor mat interferes with the operation of your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm Check operation by selecting the defrost mode any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, mat is secured using the floor mat and place the blower control on high speed. You remove the floor mat from the vehicle and fasteners on a regular basis. should be able to feel the air directed against place the floor mat in your trunk. the windshield. See an authorized dealer for  ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on service if your defroster is inoperable. MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before the passenger’s side floor area. installing any other floor mat. NEVER install Floor Mat Safety Information  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide or stack an additional floor mat on top of an into the driver’s side floor area when the Always use floor mats designed to fit your existing floor mat. vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not (Continued) interfere with the operation of the accelerator, under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that could cause a loss of vehicle control. is securely attached using the floor mat (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250

250 SAFETY

PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD Fluid Leaks WARNING! (Continued) MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE Check area under the vehicle after overnight  NEVER place any objects under the floor parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Tires mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or could change the position of the floor mat Examine tires for excessive tread wear and brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause and may cause interference with the accel- uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, should be located and corrected immediately. erator, brake, or clutch pedals. glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or XHAUST AS  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. E G re-installed, always properly attach carpet Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. to the floor and check the floor mat Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. WARNING! fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Fully depress each pedal to check for inter- inflation pressure. carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and ference with the accelerator, brake, or Lights odorless. Breathing it can make you clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. unconscious and can eventually poison you. To Have someone observe the operation of brake  It is recommended to only use mild soap avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: lights and exterior lights while you work the and water to clean your floor mats. After controls. Check turn signal and high beam  Do not run the engine in a closed garage or cleaning, always check your floor mat has indicator lights on the instrument panel. in confined areas any longer than needed been properly installed and is secured to to move your vehicle in or out of the area. your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners Door Latches  by lightly pulling mat. If you are required to drive with the trunk/ Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251

SAFETY 251

connections could permit exhaust fumes to WARNING! (Continued) seep into the passenger compartment. In WARNING! (Continued)  If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle addition, inspect the exhaust system each time  Guard against carbon monoxide with with the engine running, adjust your the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil proper maintenance. Have the exhaust heating or cooling controls to force outside change. Replace as required. system inspected every time the vehicle is air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high raised. Have any abnormal conditions ARBON ONOXIDE ARNINGS speed. C M W repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. WARNING! The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is maintained engine exhaust system. deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless be detected inside the vehicle, or when the 6 underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in have an authorized dealer inspect the complete a closed area, such as a garage, and never exhaust system and adjacent body areas for sit in a parked vehicle with the engine broken, damaged, deteriorated, or running for an extended period. If the mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252

252 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS This is an emergency warning system and it If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an should not be used when the vehicle is in ASSIST and a SOS button. The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and on the instrument panel, below the radio. it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. WARNING! When you must leave the vehicle to seek ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands continue to operate even though the ignition is on the steering wheel. You have full placed in the OFF position. responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM NOTE: Guardian™ features and applications in this With extended use, the Hazard Warning vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and Flashers may wear down your battery. SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED accident involving serious injury or death. Hazard Warning Flashers Switch

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning NOTE: Flashers. When the switch is activated, all  directional turn signals will flash on and off to Your vehicle may be transmitting data as Ú warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push authorized by the subscriber page 348. the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard  The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func- Warning Flashers. tion if you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if

Assist And SOS Mirror 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 253

your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active SOS Call  Indication that the occupant placed a and you are connected to an operable LTE SOS Call. (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. 1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.  The vehicle brand. ASSIST Call NOTE:  The last known GPS coordinates of the The ASSIST Button is used to automatically In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, vehicle. connect you to any one of the following support there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS centers: 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To operator through the vehicle audio system  Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS to determine if additional help is needed. need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the you will be connected to a representative for cancellation button on the Device Screen. WARNING! assistance. Roadside Assistance will know Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the what vehicle you’re driving and its location. green LED light on the Rearview Mirror. ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to Additional fees may apply for roadside Assis- the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands 2. The LED light located between the ASSIST tance. on the steering wheel. You have full and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will responsibility and assume all risks related to  SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – turn green once a connection to a SOS the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM 7 In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™. operator has been made. Guardian™ features and applications in this  Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and other vehicle issues. a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe system may transmit the following to do so. Failure to do so may result in an  Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for important vehicle information to a SOS accident involving serious injury or death. Radio, Phone and NAV issues. operator: 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254

254 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

NOTE: WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger  The SOS Call system is embedded into the authorized by the subscriber. (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add  Once a connection is made between the road conditions or location), do not wait for aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS voice contact from an Emergency Services vehicle’s electrical system. This may operator, the SOS operator may be able Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to open a voice connection with the immediately and move to a safe location. to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter- vehicle to determine if additional help is  Never place anything on or near the ference that can cause the SOS Call system needed. Once the SOS operator opens a vehicle’s operable network and GPS to fail, never add aftermarket equipment voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS antennas. You could prevent operable (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data Call system, the operator should be able network and GPS signal reception, which recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical to speak with you or other vehicle occu- can prevent your vehicle from placing an system or modify the antennas on your pants and hear sounds occurring in the emergency call. An operable network and vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system GPS signal reception is required for the SOS POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING will attempt to remain connected with the Call system to function properly. DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SOS operator until the SOS operator (Continued) terminates the connection. SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact  Modifications to any part of the SOS Call appropriate emergency responders and system could cause the air bag system to provide them with important vehicle fail when you need it. You could be injured information and GPS coordinates. if the air bag system is not there to help protect you. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 255

SOS Call System Limitations These include, but are not limited to, the WARNING! Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call following factors:  system capabilities. Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could  The ignition is in the OFF position. mean you will not have SOS Call services. If SOS or other emergency line operators in the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,  The vehicle’s electrical systems are not Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS have an authorized dealer service the SOS intact. system calls. Call system immediately.  The SOS Call system software and/or hard- If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,  The Occupant Restraint Control module ware are damaged during a crash. any of the following may occur at the time the turns on the air bag Warning Light on the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of instrument panel if a malfunction in any  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes each ignition cycle: part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag disconnected during a vehicle crash.  The Rearview Mirror light located between Warning Light is illuminated, have an  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously authorized dealer service the Occupant Global Positioning Satellite signals are illuminate red. Restraint Control system immediately. unavailable or obstructed.

  The Device Screen will display the following Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator message “Vehicle device requires service”. factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may facility. 7 Please contact an authorized dealer. prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.  Operator error by the SOS operator.  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network “Vehicle device requires service”. Please congestion. contact an authorized dealer.  Weather.  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256

256 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY NOTE: JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING! Changes or modifications not expressly ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to approved by the party responsible for compli- WARNING! the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands ance could void the user's authority to operate  Do not attempt to change a tire on the side on the steering wheel. You have full the equipment. of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull responsibility and assume all risks related to far enough off the road to avoid the danger the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM CAUTION! of being hit when operating the jack or Guardian™ features and applications in this To avoid damage to the mirror during changing the wheel. vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution to do so. Failure to do so may result in an dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. accident involving serious injury or death. jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a Automatic SOS — If Equipped vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get NOTE: under a raised vehicle, take it to a service Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service  center where it can be raised on a lift. Your vehicle may be transmitting data as that can immediately connect you with help in authorized by the subscriber. the event that your vehicle’s airbags deploy.  Never start or run the engine while the  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s Please refer to your provided radio supplement vehicle is on a jack. LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS for complete information.  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/ changing tires only. The jack should not be data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. which can prevent your vehicle from placing The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/ surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to function properly. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 257

PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING 3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire counterclockwise to remove it. 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Wheel Blocked NOTE: 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. Passengers should not remain in the vehicle Removing Tire Fastener when the vehicle is being lifted or raised. 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Remove the spare tire. JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE 4. Place the gear selector into PARK 5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack (automatic transmission) or FIRST gear The jack and spare tire are both stowed under counterclockwise to remove it. 7 (manual transmission). an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. NOTE: 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel The spare tire must be removed in order to diagonally opposite the jacking position. For access the jack. example, if the driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel. 1. Open the trunk. 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.

Removing Jack Fastener 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258

258 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under the spare tire. Turn the jack WARNING! (Continued) screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench,  Apply the parking brake firmly and place an and remove the wrench from the jack automatic transmission in PARK; a manual assembly. transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear.  Block the wheel diagonally opposite the WARNING! wheel to be raised. A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a  Never start or run the engine with the collision or hard stop could endanger the vehicle on a jack. Jack Warning Label occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack  Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it parts and the spare tire in the places is on a jack. Placement for the front and rear jacking provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired locations are critical. See the following images or replaced immediately.  Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised for proper jacking locations. vehicle, take it to a service center where it JACKING AND CHANGING A TIRE can be raised on a lift.  WARNING! Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire Carefully follow these tire changing warnings change. to help prevent personal injury or damage to  If working on or near a roadway, be your vehicle: extremely careful of motor traffic.  Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. Jack Engagement Locations  Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 259

2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where CAUTION! the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully on locations other than those indicated in the before raising the vehicle. Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. 3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wrench. lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while NOTE: the wheel is still on the ground. Front Lifting Point When the following label is present, the spare 4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that tire must be used for the rear wheel(s) only. For is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw a flat front tire, you must first install the spare clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle on one of the rear tires. Then, follow the jacking with the lift area of the sill flange. instructions for front tire replacement and replace the front road wheel with the wheel NOTE: removed from the rear of the vehicle. If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into position. 7

Front Jacking Location

Spare Tire Label 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260

260 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

NOTE: WARNING! For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can install a center cap or wheel cover on the make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off compact spare Ú page 325. the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the 8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped vehicle only enough to remove the tire. end of the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. 6. Remove the lug nuts and tire. 7. Mount the spare tire. WARNING! Rear Lifting Point To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the CAUTION! jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow stem facing outward. The vehicle could be this warning may result in serious injury. damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the Rear Jacking Location wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice 5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the Ú page 335. If in doubt about the correct flat tire and install the spare tire. tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service station. Mounting Spare Tire 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 261

11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE TIRE SERVICE KIT COMPONENTS AND the base of the jack faces the front of the OPERATION vehicle before tightening down the fastener. The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.

WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED Tire Service Kit Location Tire Service Kit Components 1 — Sealant Bottle Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the 2 — Deflation Button tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. 3 — Pressure Gauge 7 Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not 4 — Power Button be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be 5 — Mode Select Knob used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear) 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black) This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, 8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the allowing you to drive your vehicle up to Tire Service Kit) 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262

262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses  Using The Deflation Button  When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the form, clean water and a damp cloth will Push the Deflation Button (2) to remove the material from the vehicle or tire following symbols to indicate the air or sealant reduce the air pressure in the tire if and wheel components. Once the sealant mode. it becomes overinflated. dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly  Selecting Air Mode TIRE SERVICE KIT USAGE PRECAUTIONS discarded. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5)  Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle  For optimum performance, make sure the and turn to this position for air (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expira- valve stem on the wheel is free of debris pump operation only. Use the Black tion date (printed at the lower right hand before connecting the Tire Service Kit. Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum  You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to this mode. operation of the system Ú page 266. inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with  Selecting Sealant Mode two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) and turn to this position to inject for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat- the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to able items. However, use only the Air Pump inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items mode. to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal  Using The Power Button punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter Push and release the Power in the tread of your tire. Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location Button (4) once to turn on the Tire  Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the Service Kit. Push and release the  The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) hoses. Power Button (4) again to turn Off are a one tire application use and need to be the Tire Service Kit. replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263

SEALING A TIRE WITH TIRE SERVICE KIT WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)  Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of  A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a (A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough collision or hard stop could endanger the Kit: off the road to avoid the danger of being hit occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the when using the Tire Service Kit. Tire Service Kit in the place provided. vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.  Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the Failure to follow these warnings can result vehicle under the following circumstances: in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with your passengers, and others around you. the deflated tire) is in a position that is near  If the puncture in the tire tread is  Take care not to allow the contents of Tire to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve larger. Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on  If the tire has any sidewall damage. harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the  If the tire has any damage from driving through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and sealant into the deflated tire and running with extremely low tire pressure. respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with the air pump. Move the vehicle as  If the tire has any damage from driving eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as necessary to place the valve stem in this 7 on a flat tire. possible, if there is any contact with clothing. position before proceeding.  If the wheel has any damage.  Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto  If you are unsure of the condition of the latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, transmission) or in Gear (manual tire or the wheel. consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire transmission) and place the ignition in the Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal- OFF position.  Keep Tire Service Kit away from open lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of flames or heat source. water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce 4. Apply the parking brake. (Continued) vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264

264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit: NOTE: 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different Manual transmission vehicles must have the 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn parking brake engaged and the gear selector in another vehicle, if available. Make sure the to the Sealant Mode position. NEUTRAL. engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit. 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then  After pushing the Power Button (4), the remove the cap from the fitting at the end of sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to the hose. Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) and previous use. Call for assistance. 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground into the tire. NOTE: next to the deflated tire. NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the pump is operating, air will dispense from the then screw the fitting at the end of the the tire. Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within (6). 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug 0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Sealant Hose (6): Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant NOTE: 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or is no longer flowing through the hose the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect nails) from the tire. (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), (C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as The Deflated Tire: the Sealant Mode position and not Air 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn  Always start the engine before turning ON the will decrease quickly from approximately On the Tire Service Kit. Tire Service Kit. 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265

2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure (D) Drive Vehicle: immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating empty. Continue to operate the pump and 15 minutes: the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire the tire pressure label on the driver-side Tire Service Kit. Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the Gauge (3). top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the WARNING! sticker on the instrument panel. If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on  The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do the fitting at the end of the hose, and place to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis- not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is tance. the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this location. warning can result in injuries that are serious NOTE: or fatal to you, your passengers, and others If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla- CAUTION! around you. tion Button (2) to reduce the tire pressure to the 7  The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) recommended inflation pressure before (E) After Driving: continuing. may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. Pull over to a safe location before continuing Ú page 263.  Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, to the Air Mode position. and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug Kit components which may cause perma- into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet. nent damage to the kit. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266

266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper 3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) storage area in the vehicle. Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the onto the valve stem. bottle and dispose of it accordingly. 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the replaced at the earliest opportunity at an 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Pressure Gauge (3). authorized dealer or tire service center. Service Kit housing.

If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the instrument panel after the tire has been housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to repaired. with the hose slot in the front of the drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. housing. Push the bottle into the housing. 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: An audible click will be heard indicating the Hose (6) assembly at an authorized dealer bottle is locked into place. 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire as soon as possible. Service Kit and inflate the tire to the 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting pressure indicated on the tire and loading NOTE: at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and information label on the driver-side door When having the tire serviced, advise the autho- return the hose to its storage area (located opening. rized dealer or service center that the tire has on the bottom of the air pump). been sealed using the Tire Service Kit. NOTE: 7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla- (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: location in the vehicle. tion Button (2) to reduce the tire pressure to the 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color). recommended inflation pressure before continuing. 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the sealant bottle. valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267 JUMP STARTING PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol on If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can The battery is stored under an access cover in or around the post. be jump started using a set of jumper cables the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a the right side of the engine compartment for portable battery booster pack. Jump starting jump starting. can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

WARNING! Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. Jump Starting Posts

CAUTION! Remote Positive (+) Post Jump Starting Locations Remote Negative (-) Post Do not use a portable battery booster pack or 7 any other booster source with a system Remote Positive (+) Post See below steps to prepare for jump starting: voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to Remote Negative (-) Post the battery, starter motor, alternator or 1. Apply the parking brake, shift into PARK electrical system may occur. NOTE: (automatic transmission) or FIRST gear The remote battery posts are viewed by (manual transmission) and cycle the NOTE: standing on the right side of the vehicle looking ignition to OFF. When using a portable battery booster pack, over the fender. The positive battery post may 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical follow the manufacturer's operating instruc- be covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the accessories. tions and precautions. cap to gain access to the positive battery post. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268

268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) WARNING! jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as WARNING! (exposed metallic/unpainted post of the this could establish a ground connection and discharge vehicle) located directly behind personal injury could result. Failure to follow this jump starting procedure the under-hood fuse box. could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. WARNING! WARNING! Do not connect the jumper cable to the  Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan CAUTION! negative (-) post of the discharged battery. whenever the hood is raised. It can start The resulting electrical spark could cause the Failure to follow these procedures could anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can battery to explode and could result in result in damage to the charging system of be injured by moving fan blades. personal injury.. the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.  Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper make an inadvertent electrical contact. You booster battery, let the engine idle a few cable to the remote positive (+) post of the could be seriously injured. minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.  Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can vehicle with the discharged battery. burn your skin or eyes and generate 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) hydrogen gas which is flammable and jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the CAUTION! explosive. Keep open flames or sparks booster battery. Do not run the booster vehicle engine above away from the battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper 2,000 RPM since it provides no charging cable to the negative (-) post of the booster benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster battery. vehicle engine. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269

6. Once the engine is started, follow the If frequent jump starting is required to start your  On the highways — slow down. disconnection procedure below. vehicle you should have the battery and  In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans- charging system inspected at an authorized mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the Disconnecting The Jumper Cables dealer. engine idle speed while preventing vehicle 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the motion with the brakes. jumper cable from the remote negative (-) CAUTION! post of the vehicle with the discharged Accessories plugged into the vehicle power NOTE: battery. outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, There are steps that you can take to slow down even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, an impending overheat condition: 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of  If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery the booster battery. The A/C system adds heat to the engine will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery cooling system and turning the A/C off can 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the life and/or prevent the engine from starting. help remove this heat. jumper cable from the positive (+) post of  the booster battery. You can also turn the temperature control to IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS maximum heat, the mode control to floor and 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be the blower control to high. This allows the 7 heater core to act as a supplement to the (+) jumper cable from the remote positive serviced by an authorized dealer. (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged radiator and aids in removing heat from the battery. In any of the following situations, you can engine cooling system. reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270

270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED Follow these steps to use the Manual Park WARNING! Release: You or others can be badly burned by hot TRANSMISSION 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from WARNING! your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming 2. Remove the console storage bin to access from under the hood, do not open the hood Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the Manual Park Release lever. until the radiator has had time to cool. Never the parking brake before activating the try to open a cooling system pressure cap Manual Park Release. In addition, you should when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. be seated in the driver's seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual CAUTION! Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll Driving with a hot cooling system could away if it is not secured by the parking brake, damage your vehicle. If the temperature or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the Activating the Manual Park Release on an vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury conditioner turned off until the pointer drops or death for those in or around the vehicle. Console Storage Bin back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous In order to move the vehicle in cases where the chimes, turn the engine off immediately and transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such call for service. as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271

3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, To Reset The Manual Park Release: NOTE: fish the tether strap up through the opening When the lever is in the release position the 1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on in the console base. access cover cannot be reinstalled. the rear side) rearward (away from the 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the lever) to unlatch the lever. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE brake pedal. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or 5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the snow, it can often be moved using a rocking center of the lever, and disengage the lever motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to locking tab by pushing it to the right. clear the area around the front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or FIRST gear and REVERSE (with manual Disengaging The Lever transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of 2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain 7 forward and down, to its original position, the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels until the locking tab snaps into place to or racing the engine. Engaging The Lever secure the lever. 6. Pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up 3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm and rearward until it locks in place in the that the lever is locked in its stowed vertical position. The vehicle is now out of position. PARK and can be moved. Release the 4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the parking brake only when the vehicle is console. Reinstall the console storage bin. securely connected to a tow vehicle. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272

272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Electronic CAUTION! Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 200.  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting lead to transmission overheating and failure. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC between DRIVE / FIRST gear and REVERSE, Allow the engine to idle with the transmission OFF switch again to restore “ESC On” mode. do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may every five rocking-motion cycles. This will WARNING! result. minimize overheating and reduce the risk of Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces  Revving the engine or spinning the wheels clutch or transmission failure during generated by excessive wheel speeds may too fast may lead to transmission over- prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. cause damage, or even failure, of the axle heating and failure. It can also damage the and tires. A tire could explode and injure tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph NOTE: someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer shifting occurring). between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be than 30 seconds continuously without achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or stopping when you are stuck and do not let less. Whenever the transmission remains in anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must what the speed. press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED • 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed • 30 miles (48 km) max distance NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used, Front NOT ALLOWED same limitations as above) NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used: Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow  Ignition in ON/RUN mode Rear NOT RECOMMENDED  Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in PARK) 7 Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow and local laws regarding vehicles under tow battery is discharged, find Instructions on bars and other equipment designed for this must be observed. shifting the transmission out of PARK Ú purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s If you must use the accessories (wipers, page 270. instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC structural members of the vehicle, not to mode. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274

274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY  The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM CAUTION! Instructions on shifting the transmission to  Do not use sling type equipment when NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off (EARS) Ú towing. Vehicle damage may occur. page 270. This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced  When securing the vehicle to a flat bed  The towing distance must not exceed Accident Response System. truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen- 30 miles (48 km). This feature is a communication network that sion components. Damage to your vehicle  The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph takes effect in the event of an impact may result from improper towing. Ú (48 km/h). page 230.  FCA US LLC does not recommend towing this vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle If the transmission is not operable, or the EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) damage may occur. vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), This vehicle is equipped with an event data then the only acceptable method of towing is recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is REAR-WHEEL DRIVE (RWD) MODELS with a flatbed truck. to record data that will assist in understanding FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle how a vehicle’s systems performed under with all four wheels OFF the ground using a CAUTION! certain crash or near crash-like situations, such flatbed. as an air bag deployment or hitting a road Towing this vehicle in violation of the above obstacle Ú page 232. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the requirements can cause severe engine and/ transmission is operable, the vehicle may be or transmission damage. Damage from flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) improper towing is not covered under the New under the following conditions: Vehicle Limited Warranty. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275

275 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING The “Oil Change Required” message will be Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: displayed in the instrument cluster and a single  Check engine oil level. 3.6L AND 5.7L ENGINES chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.  Check windshield washer fluid level. These engines are equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change An authorized dealer will reset the oil change  Check tire pressure and look for unusual indicator system will remind you that it is time to indicator message after completing the wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. scheduled oil change. of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil NOTE: change indicator message will illuminate. This Under no circumstances should oil change  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, means that service is required for the vehicle. intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), brake master cylinder, and power steering (if Operating conditions such as frequent 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, equipped) and fill as needed. short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine  Check function of all interior and exterior ambient temperatures will influence when the run or idle time is generally only a concern for lights. “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message fleet customers. is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as 8 early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276

276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Plan — 3.6L And 5.7L Refer to the maintenance chart for the required maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:  Change oil and filter  Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service  Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required  Inspect the CV/Universal joints  Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake  Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses  Inspect exhaust system  Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Additional Inspections Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals and replace if X X X X X X X necessary. Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All Wheel Drive X X X X X X X Only). Inspect the manual transmission X X X X X X X fluid (if equipped). 8 Inspect the brake linings, replace as X X X X X X X necessary. Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc X X X X X X X brakes. Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel X X X X X Drive Only). 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278

278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Additional Maintenance Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X Replace spark plugs.1 X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or X X 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained X X X speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving. Change the transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the following: X X police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only). 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the front axle X X X fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. Inspect and replace PCV valve if X necessary.

1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. 8 WARNING!  You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.  Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280

280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.6L ENGINE

1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 4 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281

5.7L ENGINE

282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

CHECKING OIL LEVEL There are four possible dipstick types: CAUTION! (Continued)  Crosshatched zone. WARNING!  If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the engine to cool down before loosening  Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.  Never smoke while working in the engine the filler cap, particularly for vehicles with  Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the compartment: gas and inflammable vapors aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: low end of the range and MAX at the high end may be present, with the risk of fire. risk of burns! of the range.  Be very careful when working in the engine  Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will compartment when the engine is hot: you cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This  Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at may get burned. Do not get too close to the could damage your engine. the MIN and the MAX ends of the range. radiator cooling fan: the electric fan may start; danger of injury. Scarves, ties and NOTE: To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine other loose clothing might be pulled by Always maintain the oil level within the cross- moving parts. oil must be maintained at the correct level. hatch markings on the dipstick. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the CAUTION! engine oil level is about ten minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off. oil level to the high end of the range marking.  Be careful not to confuse the various types of fluids while topping up: they are not Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level CAUTION! compatible with each other! Topping up ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will with an unsuitable fluid could severely readings. cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This damage your car. could damage your engine.  The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark.  Always top up using engine oil of the same specifications as what is already in the engine. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283

ADDING WASHER FLUID MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY WARNING! (Continued) The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located Your vehicle is equipped with a  Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure maintenance-free battery. Water will never have sories contain lead and lead compounds. to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the to be added, and periodic maintenance is not Wash hands after handling. reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not required. radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a  The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose NOTE: few seconds to flush out the residual water. that should not be disconnected and The battery is stored under an access cover in should only be replaced with a battery of When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located the same type (vented). some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe in the engine compartment for jump starting the wiper blades clean. This will help blade Ú page 267. performance. CAUTION! To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer WARNING!  It is essential when replacing the cables on system in cold weather, select a solution or  Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and the battery that the positive cable is mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature can burn or even blind you. Do not allow attached to the positive post and the nega- range of your climate. This rating information battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or tive cable is attached to the negative post. can be found on most washer fluid containers. clothing. Do not lean over a battery when Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 Gallon attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes case. Cable clamps should be tight on the (4 Liters) of washer fluid when the message or on skin, flush the area immediately with 8 terminal posts and free of corrosion. “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the instrument large amounts of water Ú page 267. cluster.  Battery gas is flammable and explosive.  If a “fast charger” is used while the battery Keep flame or sparks away from the is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle WARNING! battery. Do not use a booster battery or any battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast Commercially available windshield washer other booster source with an output greater charger” to provide starting voltage. solvents are flammable. They could ignite and than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to burn you. Care must be exercised when filling touch each other. or working around the washer solution. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284

284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

PRESSURE WASHING ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if WARNING! the vehicle is unused for an extended period of Cleaning the engine compartment with a high You can be badly injured working on or time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or pressure washer is not recommended. around a motor vehicle. Only do service work extended idling. If the engine continues to tick for which you have the knowledge and the or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes CAUTION! proper equipment. If you have any doubt on, see the nearest authorized dealer. Precautions have been taken to safeguard all about your ability to perform a service job, parts and connections however, the take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine pressures generated by these machines is Oil Identification Symbol such that complete protection against water ENGINE OIL This symbol means that the oil has ingress cannot be guaranteed. been certified by the American Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L And 5.7L Petroleum Institute (API). The VEHICLE MAINTENANCE Engine manufacturer only recommends API For best performance and maximum protection Certified engine oils. An authorized dealer has the qualified service under all types of operating conditions, the This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, personnel, special tools, and equipment to manufacturer only recommends engine oils 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils. perform all service operations in an expert that are API Certified and meet the manner. Service Manuals are available which requirements of FCA Material Standard CAUTION! include detailed service information for your MS-6395. vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE: as the chemicals can damage your engine. Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after Such damage is not covered by the New NOTE: startup and then quiet down after approxi- Vehicle Limited Warranty. Intentional tampering with emissions control mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not systems may void your warranty and could harm the engine. This characteristic can be result in civil penalties being assessed against caused by short drive cycles: for example, if the you. vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi- 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285

Synthetic Engine Oils 4. Remove oil fill cap to add oil. 7. Allow the filter to air dry. Re-install the filter on the intake system once it is dry. You may use synthetic engine oils provided the 5. Re-install Shaker assembly. recommended oil quality requirements are met, Shaker Hood Removal And Cleaning and the recommended maintenance intervals Shaker Hood Air Filter Cleaning for oil and filter changes are followed. 1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool 1. Remove the air filter from the intake and located in glove compartment. Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the set the filter clamp a side. engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE 2. Lift off the upper scoop. viscosity grade number should not be used. 2. Measure the length of the filter media. NOTE: 3. Fill a bucket with warm clean water to the Shaker Hood — If Equipped Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside depth matching the filter media Shaker Hood Oil Filler for the Shaker assembly. measurement and add a mild household For vehicles equipped with a “Shaker Hood”, detergent or air filter cleaning solution. 3. Using a water and mild detergent clean the the upper scoop will need to be removed so that following locations: oil can be properly added to the engine. 4. Without allowing the solution to flow back into the inside of the air filter, submerge the  The water drain slot located at the front To do this, you will need follow the procedure filter media in to the water and let it soak for forward edge of the Shaker assembly. below: ten minutes.  The seals attached to the scoop and air 1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool 5. Empty the bucket filled with dirty water and box. located in glove compartment. 8 repeat steps 3 and 4.  Lower water drains located in the lower 2. Lift off the upper scoop. 6. Refill the bucket with clean warm water and Shaker assembly and air box as well as rinse the filter by rotating the filter. the hood interface areas for the seals. NOTE: Apply Mopar Leather, Rubber & Vinyl Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside NOTE: Protectant after cleaning to seals. for the Shaker assembly. The water should be clean with no signs of dirt 4. Re-install Shaker assembly. 3. Locate the oil fill cover in base assembly to in the bucket. expose the oil fill cap. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286

286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Materials Added To Engine Oil ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER T/A Air Filter Maintenance — If Equipped The manufacturer strongly recommends For the proper maintenance intervals Clean Engine Air Filter against the addition of any additives (other than Ú page 276. The scheduled air filter cleaning interval is leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil 30,000 miles (48,280 km), or if in a dusty NOTE: is an engineered product and its performance environment the engine air filter should be Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” may be impaired by supplemental additives. checked periodically to ensure optimal air flow. maintenance interval if applicable. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Cleaning your engine air filter with the Filters WARNING! recommended Mopar Performance Air Filter Service Care should be taken in disposing of used Kit is not required if you can still see any part the The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used wire screen on the entire air filter regardless of how etc.) can provide a measure of protection in oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can dirty it may appear. When any part of the wire screen the case of engine backfire. Do not remove present a problem to the environment. Contact is no longer visible on the air filter, that is an the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, an authorized dealer, service station or indication it is time to clean the air filter. etc.) unless such removal is necessary for governmental agency for advice on how and repair or maintenance. Make sure that no 1. Spray the air filter with the recommended where used oil and oil filters can be safely one is near the engine compartment before Mopar air filter cleaner and let sit for at discarded in your area. starting the vehicle with the air induction least 10 minutes to loosen dirt, before ENGINE OIL FILTER system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. rinsing. Failure to do so can result in serious personal The engine oil filter should be replaced with a NOTE: injury. new filter at every engine oil change. Never use strong detergents, high pressure, or gasoline on air filter. Engine Oil Filter Selection Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection 2. Rinse the air filter with cool low-pressure A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be The quality of replacement filters varies water applied from the inside (clean side) used for replacement. The quality of considerably. Only high quality Mopar certified out in order to flush the dirt out of the filter. replacement filters varies considerably. Only filters should be used. high quality Mopar certified filters should be Continue to rinse the filter until all traces of used. the cleaner have been removed. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287

NOTE: AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE It may be necessary to repeat steps 1 and 2 if CAUTION! the air filter is not completely clean. For best possible performance, your air Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by conditioning system as the chemicals can 3. After rinsing the air filter, gently shake off an authorized dealer at the start of each warm damage your air conditioning components. the excess water and allow air filter to dry season. This service should include cleaning of Such damage is not covered by the New naturally. Do not apply oil until air filter is the condenser fins and a performance test. Vehicle Limited Warranty. completely dry. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. NOTE: Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling Do not use forced air pressure as it may WARNING! R-134a — If Equipped damage the filtering capabilities of the filter’s R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a microfibers and also void its warranty.  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an 4. Using the Mopar Performance Air Filter your air conditioning system. Some unap- ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer Service Kit, spray oil evenly along the proved refrigerants are flammable and can recommends that air conditioning service be crown of each filter pleat holding the explode, injuring you. Other unapproved performed by an authorized dealer or other nozzle about 3 inches (76 mm) away from refrigerants or lubricants can cause the service facilities using recovery and recycling the air filter. One spray per 2 square inches system to fail, requiring costly repairs. equipment. (1,290 square mm) of air filter. With one Refer to Warranty Information Book, for NOTE: complete coat of oil, let it wick (saturate) further warranty information. 8 Use only manufacturer approved A/C system for about 20 minutes, and if required touch  The air conditioning system contains refrig- PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. up any light areas on either side of the erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of filter. personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288

288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling 1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen 3. Remove the used filter. by pressing the retaining clips. R-1234yf — If Equipped 4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a the direction of airflow, which is toward the hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the Environmental Protection Agency and is an filter will indicate this). ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system Access Door PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. 2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access Cabin Air Filter cover. The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under Cabin Air Filter the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl 5. Close the filter access cover. on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When installing a new filter, For the proper maintenance intervals ensure its proper orientation. Ú page 275.

Filter Access Cover 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289

ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys WARNING! should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.  Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running. Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your  When working near the radiator cooling fan, vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer. disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any BODY LUBRICATION time regardless of ignition mode. You could Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) Locks and all body pivot points, including such be injured by the moving fan blades. items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points  You can be badly injured working on or Conditions that would require replacement: and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding around a motor vehicle. Only do service  Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa- doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated work for which you have the knowledge and rated from belt body) periodically with a lithium-based grease, such the proper equipment. If you have any as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,  Rib or belt wear doubt about your ability to perform a easy operation and to protect against rust and service job, take your vehicle to a compe-  Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, tent mechanic. two ribs) the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess  8 When inspecting accessory drive belts, small Belt slips oil and grease should be removed. Particular cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt  “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain attention should also be given to hood latching from rib to rib, are considered normal. These correct position on pulley) components to ensure proper function. When are not a reason to replace belt. However, performing other underhood services, the hood cracks running along a rib (not across) are not  Belt broken (note: identify and correct latch, release mechanism and safety catch normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib problem before new belt is installed) should be cleaned and lubricated. must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in glazing. operation) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290

290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated NOTE: 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Life expectancy of wiper blades varies arm, press the release tab on the wiper Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality depending on geographical area and frequency blade and while holding the wiper arm with lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder of use. Poor performance of blades may be one hand, slide the wiper blade down Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. present with chattering, marks, water lines or towards the base of the wiper arm. wet spots. If any of these conditions are INDSHIELD IPER LADES W W B present, clean the wiper blades or replace as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and necessary. the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will Wiper Blade Removal/Installation remove accumulations of salt or road film. CAUTION! Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back periods may cause deterioration of the wiper against the glass without the wiper blade in blades. Always use washer fluid when using the place or the glass may be damaged. wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the 1 — Wiper Blade ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber full up position. 2 — Wiper Arm out of contact with petroleum products such as 3 — Release Tab engine oil, gasoline, etc. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291

3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper blade from the wiper arm. the wiper arm, latch engagement will be WARNING! accompanied by an audible click.  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass. colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually XHAUST YSTEM E S poison you. To avoid breathing CO, The best protection against carbon monoxide Ú page 248. entry into the vehicle body is a properly  A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you maintained engine exhaust system. park over materials that can burn. Such If you notice a change in the sound of the materials might be grass or leaves coming exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be into contact with your exhaust system. Do Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm detected inside the vehicle; or when the not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact 1 — Wiper Blade underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the anything that can burn. 2 — Wiper Arm complete exhaust system and adjacent body 3 — Release Tab areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose CAUTION! 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. connections could permit exhaust fumes to  The catalytic converter requires the use of 8 seep into the passenger compartment. In unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will Installing The Front Wipers addition, have the exhaust system inspected destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or an emissions control device and may seri- wiper arm is in the full up position. oil change. Replace as required. ously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on (Continued) the tip of the wiper arm. 3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292

292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

In unusual situations involving grossly COOLING SYSTEM CAUTION! (Continued) malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching  Damage to the catalytic converter can odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst WARNING! result if your vehicle is not kept in proper overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn  operating condition. In the event of engine off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, You or others can be badly burned by hot malfunction, particularly involving engine including a tune-up to manufacturer's engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- specifications, should be obtained immediately. mance, have your vehicle serviced from under the hood, do not open the hood To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter promptly. Continued operation of your until the radiator has had time to cool. Never damage: vehicle with a severe malfunction could open a cooling system pressure cap when the cause the converter to overheat, resulting  Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. in possible damage to the converter and ignition when the transmission is in gear and  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry vehicle. the vehicle is in motion. away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-  Do not try to start the engine by pushing or cally and may start at any time, whether the Under normal operating conditions, the towing the vehicle. catalytic converter will not require engine is running or not.  maintenance. However, it is important to keep Do not idle the engine with any spark plug  When working near the radiator cooling fan, the engine properly tuned to ensure proper wires disconnected or removed, such as disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is damage. periods during very rough idle or malfunc- temperature controlled and can start at any tioning operating conditions. time the ignition is in the ON mode. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control NOTE: systems can result in civil penalties being The vehicle exhaust system may be equipped assessed against you. with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293

Coolant Checks If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection contains visible sediment, have an authorized engine coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as every 12 months (before the onset of freezing dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive they may not be compatible with the radiator weather, where applicable). If the engine Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to engine coolant and may plug the radiator. coolant is dirty, the system should be drained, MS.90032). flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic Additive For the proper maintenance intervals  This vehicle has not been designed for use Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to Ú page 276. with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the Selection Of Coolant Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant front of the radiator for any accumulation of is not recommended. bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently For further information Ú page 341.  Some vehicles require special tools to add spraying water from a garden hose vertically NOTE: coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems down the face of the condenser. properly could lead to severe internal engine  Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for than specified Organic Additive Technology damage. If any coolant is needed to be added brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and (OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine to the system please contact an authorized tightness of the connection at the bottle and damage and may decrease corrosion protec- dealer. radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO tion. OAT engine coolant is different and NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP Adding Coolant should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Your vehicle has been built with an improved WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to 8 Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance NOTE: cooling system in an emergency, the cooling intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can Some vehicles require special tools to add system will need to be drained, flushed, and be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent properly could lead to severe internal engine MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon reducing this extended maintenance period, it damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to as possible. is important that you use the same engine the system please contact an authorized coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) dealer. throughout the life of your vehicle. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294

294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Please review these recommendations for NOTE: using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine WARNING!  It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the coolant that meets the requirements of FCA  Do not open hot engine cooling system. proper level of protection against freezing Material Standard MS.90032. When adding Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when according to the temperatures occurring in engine coolant: the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or the area where the vehicle is operated. remove the cap to cool an overheated  We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/ engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)  Some vehicles require special tools to add the cooling system. To prevent scalding or Formula OAT that meets the requirements of coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems injury, do not remove the pressure cap FCA Material Standard MS.90032. properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to while the system is hot or under pressure.  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine the system, please contact an authorized dealer.  Do not use a pressure cap other than the coolant that meets the requirements of FCA  Mixing engine coolant types is not recom- one specified for your vehicle. Personal Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled injury or engine damage may result. water. Use higher concentrations (not to mended and can result in cooling system exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain, Disposal Of Used Coolant authorized dealer for assistance. flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) MS.90032) as soon as possible. is a regulated substance requiring proper  Use only high purity water such as distilled or disposal. Check with your local authorities to deionized water when mixing the water/ Cooling System Pressure Cap determine the disposal rules for your engine coolant solution. The use of lower The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss community. To prevent ingestion by animals or quality water will reduce the amount of corro- of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure children, do not store ethylene glycol-based sion protection in the engine cooling system. that engine coolant will return to the radiator coolant in open containers or allow it to remain from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery in puddles on the ground: clean up any ground tank if equipped. spills immediately. If ingested, seek emergency The cap should be inspected and cleaned if assistance immediately. there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295

Coolant Level the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your The coolant bottle provides a quick visual mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti- vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean. method for determining that the engine coolant freeze) to enter the radiator. (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine If an examination of your engine compartment  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or off and cold, the level of the engine coolant in shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, Winter operation. If replacement is ever the bottle should be between the ranges the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther- indicated on the bottle. soon dissipate. mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis- factory engine cooling performance, poor gas The radiator normally remains completely full,  Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. so there is no need to remove the radiator cap mileage, and increased emissions.  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator unless checking for engine coolant freeze point BRAKE SYSTEM or replacing engine coolant. Advise your service and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine attendant of this. As long as the engine coolant needs to be added, the contents of In order to ensure brake system performance, operating temperature is satisfactory, the the coolant expansion bottle must also be all brake system components should be coolant bottle need only be checked once a protected against freezing. inspected periodically Ú page 276. month.  If frequent engine coolant additions are WARNING! When additional engine coolant is needed to required, the cooling system should be pres- maintain the proper level, it should be added to sure tested for leaks. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.  Maintain engine coolant concentration at a resting or riding on the brake pedal can result 8 minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to Cooling System Notes in abnormally high brake temperatures, MS.90032) and distilled water for proper excessive lining wear, and possible brake NOTE: corrosion protection of your engine which damage. You would not have your full braking When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ contains aluminum components. kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor capacity in an emergency. coming from the front of the engine compart-  Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle ment. This is normally a result of moisture from overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296

296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) Check the fluid level in the master cylinder  immediately if the brake system warning light Use only manufacturer's recommended  Do not allow petroleum based fluid to Ú indicates system failure. brake fluid page 341. Using the wrong contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal type of brake fluid can severely damage components could be damaged, causing Check the fluid level in the master cylinder your brake system and/or impair its perfor- partial or complete brake failure. This could when performing underhood services. mance. The proper type of brake fluid for result in a collision. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before your vehicle is also identified on the original removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up factory installed hydraulic master cylinder CLUTCH HYDRAULIC SYSTEM — MANUAL reservoir. to the top of the “FULL” mark on the side of the TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) master cylinder reservoir.  To avoid contamination from foreign matter The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because or moisture, use only new brake fluid or segregated volume of fluid within the brake it may cause leaking in the system. fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reser- system master cylinder reservoir. In the event of Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in leakage or wear, use only the manufacturer's requirements described on the brake fluid a open container absorbs moisture from recommended brake fluid Ú page 341. reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED expected to fall as the brake pads wear. may cause it to boil unexpectedly during However, low fluid level may be caused by a hard or prolonged braking, resulting in Fluid Level Check leak and a checkup may be needed. sudden brake failure. This could result in a Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on Use only brake fluid that has been collision. the left side of the transmission. The fluid level recommended by the manufacturer, and has  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can should be 1/4 inch (6.4mm) below the bottom been kept in a tightly closed container to avoid result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to contamination from foreign matter or moisture parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. maintain the proper level Ú page 341. Ú page 341. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297

CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the Do not use chemical flushes in your If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an manufacturer's recommended fluid may transmission as the chemicals can damage authorized dealer immediately. Severe cause deterioration in transmission shift your transmission components. Such damage transmission damage may occur. An quality and/or damage to the transmission is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited authorized dealer has the proper tools to Ú page 341. Warranty. adjust the fluid level accurately.

Change Transmission Fluid Fluid Level Check Fluid And Filter Changes If contaminated with water, change the fluid The fluid level is preset at the factory and does Under normal operating conditions, the fluid immediately. See an authorized dealer for not require adjustment under normal operating installed at the factory will provide satisfactory service. conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not lubrication for the life of the vehicle. For the proper maintenance intervals required; therefore the transmission has no Routine fluid and filter changes are not Ú page 276. dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your required. However, change the fluid and filter if transmission fluid level using special service the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for IF EQUIPPED malfunction, visit an authorized dealer any reason. immediately to have the transmission fluid level Special Additives checked. Operating the vehicle with an Selection Of Lubricant 8 The manufacturer strongly recommends improper fluid level can cause severe It is important to use the proper transmission against using any special additives in the transmission damage. fluid to ensure optimum transmission transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid performance and life. Use only the (ATF) is an engineered product and its manufacturer's specified transmission fluid performance may be impaired by supplemental Ú page 341. It is important to maintain the additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid transmission fluid at the correct level using the additives to the transmission. Avoid using recommended fluid. transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298

298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

NOTE: The front differential fill plug is located on the FUSES No chemical flushes should be used in any outer cover near the half shaft attachment. To transmission; only the approved lubricant inspect the differential fluid level, remove the fill WARNING! should be used. plug. The fluid level should be even with or  slightly below the bottom of the hole. When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the CAUTION! Fluid Changes same amp rating as the original fuse. Never Using a transmission fluid other than the For the proper maintenance intervals replace a fuse with another fuse of higher manufacturer’s recommended fluid may Ú page 275. amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with cause deterioration in transmission shift metal wires or any other material. Do not quality and/or torque converter shudder REAR AXLE place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity Ú page 341. Fluid Level Check or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on and/or property damage. ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — level ground and has been stationary for  IF EQUIPPED 15 minutes will improve the accuracy of the Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the fluid level reading. ignition is off and that all the other services The All Wheel Drive system consists of a are switched off and/or disengaged. transfer case and front differential. The exterior Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on  If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an surface of these components should be the axle. The fluid level should be 1-2.5 mm authorized dealer. inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed below the fill plug. Add fluid, if necessary, to leaks should be repaired as soon as possible. maintain the proper level Ú page 341.  If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), Change Axle Fluid The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is power unit systems (engine system, trans- located in the middle of the rear housing. To For the proper maintenance intervals mission system) or steering system blows, inspect the transfer case fluid level, remove the Ú page 275. contact an authorized dealer. fill/inspection plug. The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug to add fluid as required. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299

General Information The fuses protect electrical systems against Underhood Fuses excessive current. The Front Power Distribution Center is located WARNING! When a device does not work, you must check in the engine compartment. This module  When replacing a blown fuse, always use the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location an appropriate replacement fuse with the break/melt. and descriptions are printed on the inside of the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never Also, please be aware that when using power power distribution center cover. replace a fuse with another fuse of higher outlets for extended periods of time with the amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with engine off may result in vehicle battery metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity discharge. or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.  Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.  If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an Front Power Distribution Center Location authorized dealer. 8  If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), Blade Fuses power unit systems (engine system, trans- 1 — Fuse Element mission system) or steering system blows, 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse contact an authorized dealer. element 3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element (blown fuse) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300

300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)  When installing the power distribution  When replacing a blown fuse, it is important center cover, it is important to ensure the to use only a fuse having the correct cover is properly positioned and fully amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a latched. Failure to do so may allow water to rating other than indicated may result in a get into the power distribution center and dangerous electrical system overload. If a possibly result in an electrical system properly rated fuse continues to blow, it failure. indicates a problem in the circuit that must (Continued) be corrected. Front Power Distribution Center 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 1 – – Fuse – Spare 2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged) 3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped 4 30 Amp Pink – Starter 5 40 Amp Green – Anti Lock Brake 6 30 Amp Pink – Anti Lock Brake 7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1 8 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2 9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Under Hood 10 – 10 Amp Red Lamp – Police 11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns 12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch 13 – – Fuse – Spare 8 14 – – Fuse – Spare 15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID Headlamp– If Equipped 16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID Headlamp– If Equipped 18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302

302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped 20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washers – If Equipped 21 – 20 Amp Blue – Police Police Bat Feed #2 23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1 28 – – Fuse – Spare Auto Transmission Control Module (Challenger / 29 – 15 Amp Blue Charger Police) 30 – – Fuse – Spare 31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module 32 – – Fuse – Spare 33 – – Fuse – Spare 34 – 25 Amp Clear ASD Feed #1 35 – 20 Amp Yellow ASD Feed #2 Anti-Lock Brake Module / Steering Column Lock 36 – 10 Amp Red Module (300 if equipped) 37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller 38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 39 – 10 Amp Red AC Clutch/ EPS */ Vacuum Pump * 48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module / Front Axle Disconnect – If Equipped 49 – – Fuse – Spare 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 50 – – Fuse – Spare 51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump – If Equipped 52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped 53 – – Fuse – Spare

Rear Interior Fuses CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) There is also a power distribution center located  in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. When installing the power distribution  When replacing a blown fuse, it is important This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse center cover, it is important to ensure the to use only a fuse having the correct cover is properly positioned and fully cavity location and descriptions are printed on amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a latched. Failure to do so may allow water to the inside of the power distribution center rating other than indicated may result in a get into the power distribution center and dangerous electrical system overload. If a cover. possibly result in an electrical system properly rated fuse continues to blow, it failure. indicates a problem in the circuit that must (Continued) be corrected. 8

Rear Power Distribution Center 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304

304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description F02 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1 F03 – – Fuse – Spare F04 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2 30 Amp Pink F05 – Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police 20 Amp Blue – Police F06 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1 F07 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2 F08 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting F09 40 Amp Green – Power Locks F10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module F11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module Dual USB Center Console Rear/ F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter/ IP APO – If Equipped F15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower F16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police F17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police F18 30 Amp Pink – VISM MOD (Police) F19 – – Fuse – Spare F20 – – Fuse – Spare F21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L ADR) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description F22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Mod Fuel Door – If Equipped/Diagnostic F23 – 10 Amp Red Port F24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack F25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor Transmission Module (300/ F26 – 15 Amp Blue Charger Non- Police) F27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped F31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – If Equipped F32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster Ignition Switch/RF Hub Module/ Steering Column Lock (300) – If F33 – 15 Amp Blue Equipped/ Remote Start – If Equipped Steering Column Module/Clock F34 – 10 Amp Red 8 (300) F35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor F36 – 15 Amp Blue Active Exhaust Valve – If Equipped F37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio F38 – 20 Amp Yellow Media Hub/ Console APO F42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306

306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description RR Heated Seat / Heated Steering F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Wheel – If Equipped Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear F44 – 10 Amp Red View Camera – If Equipped Cluster / Rearview Mirror / F45 – 15 Amp Blue Compass (Charger/300) / Lane Departure F46 – – Fuse – Spare Adaptive Front Lighting / Day Time F47 – 10 Amp Red Running Lamps – If Equipped F49 – – Fuse – Spare F50 – – Fuse – Spare Front Heated / Vented Seats – If F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Equipped Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated F52 – 10 Amp Red Seat Switches – If Equipped HVAC Module/In Vehicle F53 – 10 Amp Red Temperature Sensor F54 – – Fuse – Spare F55 – – Fuse – Spare F56 – – Fuse – Spare F57 – – Fuse – Spare 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description F58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module F59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police F60 – – Fuse – Spare F61 – – Fuse – Spare F62 – – Fuse – Spare F63 – – Fuse – Spare F64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300) F65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module F66 – – Fuse – Spare Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / F67 – 10 Amp Red Inside RR View Mirror / Police Run Acc Relay RR USB Timer/ RR Sunshade – If F68 – 10 Amp Red Equipped F69 – – Fuse – Spare 8 F70 – – Fuse – Spare 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308

308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

BULB REPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs NOTE: See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement. All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.

Interior Bulbs Bulb Name Bulb Number Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578 Visor Vanity Lamps A6220 Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194 Door Courtesy 562 Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309

Exterior Bulbs Bulb Name Bulb Number Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID) D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer) * Halogen Headlamp HIR2LL Front Park/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Front Fog Lamp H11LL Front Side Marker LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Tail Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Rear Side Marker LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) License LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)

* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key 8 removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310

310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Replacing Exterior Bulbs 2. Remove the large dust cap from the headlamp housing by turning it counter- CAUTION! Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp — clockwise. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Models With Halogen Headlamps — If Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise, and Equipped life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily remove. See below steps to replace: surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 1. Open the hood. 6. Reinstall the access cap making sure it is seated into the housing and turn cap clockwise to engage locking lugs. Visually, you should be unable to see the blue O-ring gasket. The access cap should be uniformly seated and you should not be able to pull the access cap off without turning it counterclockwise. Headlamp Location CAUTION! 4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket Headlamp Assembly Dust Cap Location assembly and install the replacement bulb. If the access cap is not installed correctly NOTE: after bulb replacement, the lamp becomes 5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be susceptible to dust, condensation, and water the headlamp assembly, and then turn it necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the head- intrusion. This may ultimately lead to an clockwise. lamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle. inoperative lamp. If the access cap cannot be installed correctly, please return to an authorized dealer for proper repair or access cap replacement if necessary. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311

Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp — Front Park/Signature Lamp Center Tail/Backup Lamp Models With High Intensity Discharge (HID) The Front Park/Signature function is part of the The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps Headlamps — If Equipped headlamp assembly and use LED lamps that that are not serviceable separately. The Center The headlamps are a type of high voltage are not serviceable separately. The headlamps Tail/Backup Lamp must be replaced as an discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the must be replaced as an assembly, see an assembly; see an authorized dealer. circuit even with the headlamp switch off and authorized dealer. the key removed. Because of this, you should Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) not attempt to service a headlamp bulb Front Turn/DRL Lamp The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your The Front Turn/DRL function is part of the not serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. headlamp assembly and use LED lamps that must be replaced as an assembly; see an are not serviceable separately. The headlamps authorized dealer. WARNING! must be replaced as an assembly, see an authorized dealer. License Lamp A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb The License Lamp uses an LED source that is sockets of HID headlamps when the Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp not serviceable separately. The License Lamp headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not must be replaced as an assembly; see an serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviceable separately. The Side Markers must authorized dealer. serviced properly. See an authorized dealer be replaced as an assembly, see an authorized for service. dealer. TIRES 8 NOTE: Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps Tire safety information will cover aspects of the when the headlamps are turned on, there is a that are not serviceable separately. The Tail/ following information: Tire Markings, Tire blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and Turn and Stop Lamps must be replaced as an Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and becomes more white after approximately 10 assembly, see an authorized dealer. Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. seconds, as the system charges. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312

312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Markings NOTE:  Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary  P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on high pressure compact spare tires have the US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding preceding the size designation. Example: the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 T145/80D18 103M. 95H.  High flotation tire sizing is based on US  European — Metric tire sizing is based on design standards and it begins with the tire European design standards. Tires designed diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: to this standard have the tire size molded 31x10.5 R15 LT. into the sidewall beginning with the section Tire Markings width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based (TIN) on US design standards. The size designation 2 — Size Designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric 3 — Service Description tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size 4 — Maximum Load designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)  Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code  "R" means radial construction, or 8  "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index  A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314

314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

EXAMPLE: H = Speed Symbol  A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions  The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:  XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or  LL = Light load tire or  C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315

Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation  This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)  03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)  01 means the year 2001 8  Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316

316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a Cold Tire Inflation Pressure minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the Tire Placard original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317

Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading Steps For Determining Correct Load The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not Limit— exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on (1) Locate the statement “The combined your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load weight of occupants and cargo should carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your pressures specified on the Tire and Loading vehicle's placard. Information placard Ú page 122. (2) Determine the combined weight of NOTE: the driver and passengers that will be Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, riding in your vehicle. Tire And Loading Information Placard Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the This placard tells you important information driver and passengers from XXX kg or about the: For further information on GAWR, vehicle XXX lbs. loading, and trailer towing Ú page 122. 1. Number of people that can be carried in (4) The resulting figure equals the the vehicle. To determine the maximum loading conditions available amount of cargo and luggage of your vehicle, locate the statement “The load capacity. For example, if “XXX” 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. combined weight of occupants and cargo amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will 8 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The be five 150 lb passengers in your 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage vehicle, the amount of available cargo rear, and spare tires. and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. never exceed the weight referenced here. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318

318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

(5) Determine the combined weight of Metric Example For Load Limit NOTE: luggage and cargo being loaded on the For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load vehicle. That weight may not safely and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your from your trailer will be transferred to your exceed the available cargo and luggage vehicle, the amount of available cargo and vehicle. The following table shows examples load capacity calculated in Step 4. luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 on how to calculate total load, cargo/ (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. luggage, and towing capacities of your (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, vehicle with varying seating configurations load from your trailer will be transferred and number and size of occupants. This table to your vehicle. Consult this manual to is for illustration purposes only and may not determine how this reduces the be accurate for the seating and load carry available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. capacity of your vehicle.  For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION  Safety WARNING! 8  Fuel Economy Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Tire Pressure Overloading can cause tire failure, affect Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the  Tread Wear vehicle handling, and increase your stopping safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.  distance. Use tires of the recommended load Four primary areas are affected by improper tire Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability capacity for your vehicle. Never overload pressure: them. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320

320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the Tire Inflation Pressures stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed WARNING! of sluggish response or over responsiveness in on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the  Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and the steering. driver's side door. can cause collisions. NOTE: At least once a month:  Underinflation increases tire flexing and  Unequal tire pressures from side to side may  Check and adjust tire pressure with a good can result in overheating and tire failure. cause erratic and unpredictable steering quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not  Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to response. make a visual judgment when determining cushion shock. Objects on the road and proper inflation. Tires may look properly  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may chuckholes can cause damage that result inflated even when they are underinflated. cause the vehicle to drift left or right. in tire failure.  Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible  Overinflated or underinflated tires can Fuel Economy damage. affect vehicle handling and can fail Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. CAUTION! control. Tread Wear After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,  Unequal tire pressures can cause steering always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will problems. You could lose control of your Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause prevent moisture and dirt from entering the vehicle. abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire valve stem, which could damage the valve  Unequal tire pressures from one side of the replacement. stem. vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability  Always drive with each tire inflated to the Proper tire inflation contributes to a recommended cold tire inflation pressure. comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire The manufacturer advocates driving at safe WARNING! inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure speeds and within posted speed limits. Where after the vehicle has not been driven for at least speed limits or conditions are such that the Combining radial ply tires with other types of 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) vehicle can be driven at high speeds, tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to after sitting for a minimum of 3 hours. The cold maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is handle poorly. The instability could cause a tire inflation pressure must not exceed the very important. Increased tire pressure and collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of maximum inflation pressure molded into the reduced vehicle loading may be required for four. Never combine them with other types of tire sidewall. high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an tires. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a authorized tire dealer or original equipment wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating Tire Repair pressures vary with temperature changes. speeds, loading and cold tire inflation If your tire becomes damaged, it may be pressures. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi repaired if it meets the following criteria: (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature  The tire has not been driven on when flat. change. Keep this in mind when checking tire WARNING! pressure inside a garage, especially in the High speed driving with your vehicle under  The damage is only on the tread section of Winter. maximum load is dangerous. The added your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). strain on your tires could cause them to fail. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)  You could have a serious collision. Do not The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an 8 and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then inch (6 mm). the cold tire inflation pressure should be drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside (120 km/h). and additional information. temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322

322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded Tread Wear Indicators have experienced a loss of pressure should be at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in Tread wear indicators are in the original replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire the Run Flat mode. equipment tires to help you in determining of identical size and service description (Load See the tire pressure monitoring section for when your tires should be replaced. Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire more information. pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused. Tire Spinning Run Flat Tires — If Equipped When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a seconds continuously without stopping. rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. For further information Ú page 271. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a WARNING! Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces Tire Tread limited driving capabilities and needs to be generated by excessive wheel speeds may 1 — Worn Tire replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not cause tire damage or failure. A tire could 2 — New Tire repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed explode and injure someone. Do not spin after driving with underinflated tire condition, your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph These indicators are molded into the bottom of please replace the TPM sensor as it is not (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds the tread grooves. They will appear as bands designed to be reused when driven under Run continuously when you are stuck, and do not when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the what the speed. NOTE: tread wear indicators, the tire should be TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the replaced. vehicle on a flat tire condition. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323

Life Of Tire NOTE: See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the The service life of a tire is dependent upon Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual varying factors including, but not limited to: when installing new tires due to wear and tear for more information relating to the Load Index in existing tires. and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 311.  Driving style. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with It is recommended to replace the two front tires  Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres- as little exposure to light as possible. Protect or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire sures can cause uneven wear patterns to tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If develop across the tire tread. These abnormal you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in Replacement Tires wheel’s specifications match those of the the need for earlier tire replacement. The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance original wheels. of many characteristics. They should be  Distance driven. It is recommended you contact an authorized inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any  Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer questions you may have on tire specifications or V or higher, and Summer tires typically have strongly recommends that you use tires capability. Failure to use equivalent a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and replacement tires may adversely affect the per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is performance when replacement is needed safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. highly recommended. Ú page 322. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification WARNING! Label for the size designation of your tire. The 8 Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after be found on the original equipment tire six years, regardless of the remaining tread. sidewall. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324

324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

For more information, contact an authorized WARNING! CAUTION! dealer.  Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or Replacing original tires with tires of a Summer tires do not contain the all season speed rating other than that specified for different size may result in false speedometer designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on your vehicle. Some combinations of unap- and odometer readings. the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets proved tires and wheels may change of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the suspension dimensions and performance TIRE TYPES safety and handling of your vehicle. characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your All Season Tires — If Equipped WARNING! vehicle. This can cause unpredictable All Season tires provide traction for all seasons handling and stress to steering and Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction suspension components. You could lose conditions. You could lose vehicle control, levels may vary between different all season control and have a collision resulting in resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too tires. All season tires can be identified by the serious injury or death. Use only the tire and fast for conditions also creates the possibility M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire wheel sizes with load ratings approved for of loss of vehicle control. sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; your vehicle. failure to do so may adversely affect the safety  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or and handling of your vehicle. Snow Tires capacity, other than what was originally Some areas of the country require the use of equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be a smaller load index could result in tire identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol overloading and failure. You could lose Summer tires provide traction in both wet and on the tire sidewall. control and have a collision. dry conditions, and are not intended to be If you need snow tires, select tires  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equivalent in size and type to the having adequate speed capability can equipped with Summer tires, be aware these original equipment tires. Use snow result in sudden tire failure and loss of tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving tires only in sets of four; failure to do vehicle control. conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F so may adversely affect the safety and handling (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. of your vehicle. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped CAUTION! than what was originally equipped with your The compact spare is for temporary emergency vehicle and should not be operated at Because of the reduced ground clearance, do use only. You can identify if your vehicle is sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For not take your vehicle through an automatic equipped with a compact spare by looking at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to car wash with a compact or limited use the spare tire description on the Tire and original equipment or an authorized tire dealer temporary spare installed. Damage to the Loading Information Placard located on the for recommended safe operating speeds, vehicle may result. driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of loading and cold tire inflation pressures. the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin While studded tires improve performance on For restrictions when towing with a spare tire with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry designated for temporary emergency use designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. Ú page 127. surfaces may be poorer than that of T, S = Temporary Spare Tire non-studded tires. Some states prohibit Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the original studded tires; therefore, local laws should be And Wheel — If Equipped checked before using these tire types. equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED and wheel equivalent in look and function to the opportunity. original equipment tire and wheel found on the NOTE: Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire since the wheel is designed specifically for the 8 If your vehicle has this option, refer to an Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for compact spare tire. Do not install more than authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire further information. one compact spare tire and wheel on the rotation pattern. vehicle at any given time. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326

326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is Full Size Spare — If Equipped WARNING! properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the The full size spare is for temporary emergency Compact and collapsible spares are for collapsible tire using the electric air pump use only. This tire may look like the originally temporary emergency use only. With these before lowering the vehicle. equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your spares, do not drive more than 50 mph Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have a conventional tire on the collapsible spare limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the limited tread life. When the tread is worn to wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically tread wear indicators, the temporary use full the tread wear indicators, the temporary use for the collapsible spare tire. size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to not the same as your original equipment tire, follow the warnings, which apply to your WARNING! replace (or repair) the original equipment tire spare. Failure to do so could result in spare and reinstall on the vehicle at the first tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these opportunity. spares, do not drive more than 50 mph Limited Use Spare — If Equipped Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have The limited use spare tire is for temporary The collapsible spare is for temporary limited tread life. When the tread is worn to emergency use only. This tire is identified by a emergency use only. You can identify if your the tread wear indicators, the temporary use label located on the limited use spare wheel. vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to This label contains the driving limitations for looking at the spare tire description on the Tire follow the warnings, which apply to your this spare. This tire may look like the original and Loading Information Placard located on the spare. Failure to do so could result in spare equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of tire failure and loss of vehicle control. vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited the tire. use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it Collapsible spare tire description example: is not the same as your original equipment tire, 165/80-17 101P. replace (or repair) the original equipment tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the original and reinstall on the vehicle at the first equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) opportunity. and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including WARNING! caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the Limited use spares are for emergency use chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals only. Installation of this limited use spare tire chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on and equipment to prevent damage to the affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar drive more than the speed listed on the soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the recommended or select a non-abrasive, cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome and Loading Information Placard located on from corroding and tarnishing. wheels. the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the CAUTION! CAUTION! original equipment tire at the first opportunity Avoid products or automatic car washes that Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do use acidic solutions or strong alkaline brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These so could result in loss of vehicle control. additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket products may damage the wheel's protective wheel cleaners and automatic car washes finish. Such damage is not covered by the WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE may damage the wheel's protective finish. New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash Such damage is not covered by the New soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, recommended. and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water 8 recommended. to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328

328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

NOTE: Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or SNOW TRACTION DEVICES If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels an extended period after cleaning the wheels Use of traction devices require sufficient with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply CAUTION! tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are the brakes to remove the water droplets from If your vehicle is equipped with these the brake components. This activity will remove recommended. Follow these recommendations specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel to guard against damage. the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.  vehicle vibration when braking. They will permanently damage this finish and Snow traction device must be of proper size such damage is not covered by the New for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer. Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT  No other tire sizes are recommended for use CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that with the snow traction device. is required to maintain this finish.  Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:

Snow Traction Device RWD Axle Tire/Wheel Size (maximum projection beyond Trim Level tire profile or equivalent) SXT 235/55R18 Peerless Chain Super Z6 Low GT Rear 235/55R18 Profile or Equivalent R/T 18 x 7.5 x 24mm R/T SCAT PACK NONE 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329

Snow Traction Device AWD Axle Tire/Wheel Size (maximum projection beyond Trim Level tire profile or equivalent) SXT Rear 235/55R19 S Class GT

WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) Using tires of different size and type (M+S,  Install device as tightly as possible and  Do not use traction devices on a compact Snow) between front and rear axles can then retighten after driving about ½ mile spare tire. cause unpredictable handling. You could lose (0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not control and have a collision. require retightening. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS  Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles CAUTION!  Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and operate at different loads and perform different large bumps, especially with a loaded steering, driving, and braking functions. For To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, vehicle. these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. observe the following precautions:  Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry These effects can be reduced by timely rotation 8  Because of restricted traction device clear- pavement. of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially ance between tires and other suspension worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such components, it is important that only trac-  Observe the traction device manufacturer’s tion devices in good condition are used. instructions on the method of installation, as those on all season type tires. Rotation will Broken devices can cause serious damage. operating speed, and conditions for use. increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow Stop the vehicle immediately if noise Always use the suggested operating speed and wet traction levels, and contribute to a occurs that could indicate device breakage. of the device manufacturer’s if it is less smooth, quiet ride. Remove the damaged parts of the device than 30 mph (48 km/h). before further use. (Continued) (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330

330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

For the proper maintenance intervals tire's manufacturer in each category is TRACTION GRADES Ú page 275. The reasons for any rapid or shown on the sidewall of the tires on The Traction grades, from highest to unusual wear should be corrected prior to your vehicle. rotation being performed. lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform The suggested rotation method is the “rearward represent the tire's ability to stop on wet cross” shown in the following diagram. This to Federal safety requirements in pavement, as measured under rotation pattern does not apply to some addition to these grades. controlled conditions on specified directional tires that must not be reversed. TREADWEAR government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor The Treadwear grade is a comparative traction performance. rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions WARNING! on a specified government test course. The traction grade assigned to this tire is For example, a tire graded 150 would based on straight-ahead braking traction wear one and one-half times as well on tests, and does not include acceleration, the government course as a tire graded cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction 100. The relative performance of tires characteristics. Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross) depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart TEMPERATURE GRADES DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION significantly from the norm due to The Temperature grades are A (the UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES variations in driving habits, service highest), B, and C, representing the tire's practices, and differences in road The following tire grading categories resistance to the generation of heat and characteristics and climate. were established by the National its ability to dissipate heat, when tested Highway Traffic Safety Administration. under controlled conditions on a The specific grade rating assigned by the specified indoor laboratory test wheel. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331 Sustained high temperature can cause VEHICLE STORAGE parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne the material of the tire to degenerate contaminants, road surfaces on which the If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more and reduce tire life, and excessive vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather than 3 weeks, you may want to take these steps and other extreme conditions will have an temperature can lead to sudden tire to protect your battery. adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and failure. The grade C corresponds to a  Disconnect the negative cable from the underbody protection. level of performance, which all battery. The following maintenance recommendations passenger vehicle tires must meet will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. Standard No. 109. Grades B and A more, run the air conditioning system at idle What Causes Corrosion? represent higher levels of performance for about five minutes in the fresh air and Corrosion is the result of deterioration or on the laboratory test wheel, than the high blower setting. This will ensure removal of paint and protective coatings from minimum required by law. adequate system lubrication to minimize the your vehicle. possibility of compressor damage when the WARNING! system is started again. The most common causes are: The temperature grade for this tire is BODYWORK  Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. established for a tire that is properly inflated  Stone and gravel impact. and not overloaded. Excessive speed, PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC  Insects, tree sap and tar. 8 underinflation, or excessive loading, either AGENTS separately or in combination, can cause heat  Salt in the air near seacoast localities. buildup and possible tire failure. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332

332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE PRESERVING THE BODYWORK CAUTION! Cleaning Headlights Washing  Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights  Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash materials such as steel wool or scouring and fog lights that are lighter and less your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car powder that will scratch metal and painted susceptible to stone breakage than glass Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the surfaces. panels completely with water. headlights.  Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or therefore different lens cleaning procedures accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar removal of paint and decals. must be followed. Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. To minimize the possibility of scratching the Special Care lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping  Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as  If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar- a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. stains and to protect your paint finish. Use riage at least once a month. precautions to not scratch the paint. Do not use abrasive cleaning components,  It is important that the drain holes in the solvents, steel wool or other aggressive  Avoid using abrasive compounds and power lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and material to clean the lenses. buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin trunk be kept clear and open. out the paint finish.  If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333

 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision Seat Belt Maintenance PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS or similar cause that destroys the paint and Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with protective coating, have your vehicle repaired Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will as soon as possible. weaken the fabric. CAUTION!  If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani- materials are well packaged and sealed. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated  If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. surfaces of the interior may cause perma- consider mud or stone shields behind each Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. nent damage. Wipe away immediately. wheel. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn  Damage caused by these type of products  Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as or if the buckles do not work properly. may not be covered by your New Vehicle soon as possible. An authorized dealer has Limited Warranty. touch up paint to match the color of your WARNING! vehicle. A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster collision and leave you with no protection. Lenses INTERIORS Inspect the belt system periodically, checking The lenses in front of the instruments in this for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts EATS ND ABRIC ARTS vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When S A F P must be replaced immediately. Do not cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to 8 disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric avoid scratching the plastic. upholstery and carpeting. assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution WARNING! retractor, torn webbing, etc.). may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a purposes. Many are potentially flammable, soft cloth. and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334

334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

LEATHER SURFACES NOTE: GLASS SURFACES If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a for leather upholstery. transfer more so than darker colors. The leather regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any Your leather upholstery can be best preserved is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom- commercial household-type glass cleaner. by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. when cleaning the inside rear window equipped and damage the leather upholstery and should with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or be removed promptly with a damp cloth. CAUTION! Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft other sharp instruments that may scratch the Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be elements. Ketone based cleaning products to clean taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray leather upholstery, as damage to the with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. upholstery may result. cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335

335 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) BRAKE SYSTEM WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS The VIN is on the left front corner of the Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to instrument panel. The VIN is visible from brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to outside of the vehicle through the windshield. systems loses normal capability, the remaining the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed system will still function. There will be some loss and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/ of overall braking effectiveness. This may be bolts should be torqued using a properly evident by increased pedal travel during calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex) application, greater pedal force required to slow deep wall socket. or stop, and potential activation of the Brake TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Warning Light. In the event power assist is lost for any reason Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt (for example, repeated brake applications with Torque Bolt Size Socket Size the engine off), the brakes will still function. The 130 Ft-Lbs M14 x 1.50 22 mm effort required to brake the vehicle will be much (176 N·m) Windshield VIN Location greater than that required with the power NOTE: system operating. **Use only authorized dealer recommended It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or 9 oil before tightening. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336

336 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt FUEL REQUIREMENTS mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are loose particles. properly tightened. While operating on gasoline with the required octane number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine failure and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure WARNING! 3.6L ENGINE that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/ To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends bolt (do not insert it halfway). jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully greater than 15% in this engine. until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to NOTE: follow this warning may result in personal This engine is designed to meet all If in doubt about the correct tightness, have injury. emissions regulations and provide them checked with a torque wrench by an excellent fuel economy and authorized dealer or service station. performance when using high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 337

5.7L ENGINE (WITH AUTOMATIC REFORMULATED GASOLINE www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. TRANSMISSION) Many areas of the country require the use of Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends cleaner burning gasoline referred to as agents should be avoided. Many of these greater than 15% in this engine. “reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are materials intended for gum and varnish This engine is designed to meet all specifically blended to reduce vehicle removal may contain active solvents or similar emissions regulations and provide emissions and improve air quality. ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket satisfactory fuel economy and and diaphragm materials. performance when using high quality The use of reformulated gasoline is unleaded gasoline having a posted octane recommended. Properly blended reformulated GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS number range of 87 to 89 as specified by the gasoline will provide improved performance Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane “Plus” and durability of engine and fuel system with oxygenates such as ethanol. gasoline is recommended for optimum components. performance and fuel economy. MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL CAUTION! 5.7L ENGINE (WITH MANUAL Besides using unleaded gasoline with the DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing TRANSMISSION) proper octane rating, gasolines that contain methanol, or gasoline containing more than detergents, corrosion and stability additives are 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends recommended. Using gasolines that have these result in starting and drivability problems, greater than 15% in this engine. additives will help improve fuel economy, damage critical fuel system components, This engine is designed to meet all reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle cause emissions to exceed the applicable emission regulations, provide optimal performance. standard, and/or cause the Malfunction 9 fuel economy and performance when Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe Designated TOP TIER Detergent using high-quality unleaded “Premium” pump labels as they should clearly Gasoline contains a higher level of gasoline having a posted octane number of 91 as communicate if a fuel contains greater than detergents to further aide in specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 15% ethanol (E-15). minimizing engine and fuel system or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required deposits. When available, the usage of TOP for this engine. TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338

338 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Problems that result from using gasoline CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or MODIFICATIONS MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void Modifications that allow the engine to run on GASOLINE or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid MMT is a manganese-containing metallic Warranty. Propane (LP) may result in damage to the additive that is blended into some gasoline to engine, emissions, and fuel system increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL components. Problems that result from running provides no performance advantage beyond VEHICLES CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the gasoline of the same octane number without Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible manufacturer and may void or not be covered MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. spark plug life and reduces emissions system (E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol performance in some vehicles. The content may void the New Vehicle Limited manufacturer recommends that gasoline Warranty. without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains these symptoms: MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and  Operate in a lean mode. California reformulated gasoline.  OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.  Poor engine performance.  Poor cold start and cold drivability.  Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 339

FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS NOTE: CAUTION! (Continued) Intentional tampering with the emissions CAUTION!  The use of fuel additives, which are now control system can result in civil penalties being being sold as octane enhancers, is not assessed against you. Follow these guidelines to maintain your recommended. Most of these products vehicle’s performance: contain high concentrations of methanol.  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor- Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can mance problems resulting from the use of impair engine performance and damage such fuels or additives is not the responsi- the emissions control system. bility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni- Limited Warranty. tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance. (Continued)

9 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340

340 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FLUID CAPACITIES

US Metric Fuel (Approximate) All Engines 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters 5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters Cooling System* 3.6L Engine 11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters 5.7L Engine 14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 341 ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/ Engine Coolant 150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar SAE Engine Oil – 3.6L/5.7L Engine 5W-20, Pennzoil SAE 5W-20, and Pennzoil gold 5W-20 semi-synthetic oil. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements. Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol. 89 Octane recommended – 87 Octane acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine With Automatic Transmission 0-15% ethanol. Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine With Manual Transmission 91 Octane or higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol.

9 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342

342 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)  Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based  This vehicle has not been designed for use than specified Organic Additive Technology engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based result in engine damage and may decrease products, as they may not be compatible engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom- corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech- with the radiator engine coolant and may mended. nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and plug the radiator. should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic (Continued) Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. (Continued) 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 343 CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or Automatic Transmission – If Equipped equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped) (API GL-5). We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 Rear Axle – 3.6L/5.7L Engine With Automatic Transmission (API GL-5). We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE Rear Axle – 5.7L Engine With Manual Transmission 75W85 (API GL-5). We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped) 44–40.

9 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344

344 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to FOR YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the timely manner. PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized This is why you should always talk to an All work to be performed may not be covered by dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for the warranty. Discuss additional charges with (additional charges may apply). If you need a some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the service manager. Keep a maintenance log rental, it is advisable to make these the general manager or owner of the authorized of your vehicle's service history. This can often arrangements when you call for an dealer. They want to know if you need provide a clue to the current problem. appointment. assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to PREPARE A LIST resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA US LLC's Customer Assistance center. Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE the specific work you want done. If you've had FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer an accident or work done that is not on your interested in your satisfaction. We want you to center should include the following information: maintenance log, let the service advisor know. be happy with our products and services.  Owner's name and address Warranty service must be done by an  Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that and office) you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most  Authorized dealer name concerned that you get prompt and high quality  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have  Vehicle delivery date and mileage 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 345

FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS SERVICE CONTRACT P.O. Box 21–8004 FCA Caribbean LLC You may have purchased a service contract for Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 P.O. Box 191857 a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Phone: (800) 423-6343 San Juan 00919-1857 Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER Phone: (800) 423-6343 Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized, Fax: (787) 782-3345 P.O. Box 1621 endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE additional protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/ Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions 387-9983 French TTY) and an Owner Identification Card in the mail MEXICO To assist customers who have hearing within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special If you have any questions about the service Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) contract, call the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract Sante Fe C.P. 05109 equipment at its customer center. Any hearing National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 Mexico, D. F. or speech impaired customer, who has access (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) English / (800) 387-9983 French). In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300 in the United States, can communicate with FCA FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479. contract you may have purchased from another Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that manufacturer. If you require service after the require assistance can use the special needs FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY expires, please refer to the contract documents, 10 teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice and contact the person listed in those callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a documents. Bell Relay Service operator. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346

346 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

We appreciate that you have made a major Use this QR code to access your If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it investment when you purchased the vehicle. An digital experience. may open an investigation, and if it finds authorized dealer has also made a major that a safety defect exists in a group of investment in facilities, tools, and training to vehicles, it may order a recall and ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. remedy campaign. However, NHTSA MOPAR PARTS cannot become involved in individual WARNING! Mopar original equipment parts & accessories problems between you, an authorized Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines and factory filled fluids are available from an dealer or FCA US LLC. only), some of its constituents, and certain authorized dealer. They are recommended for To contact NHTSA, you may call the your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and vehicle components contain, or emit, Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at chemicals known to the State of California to maintain its original condition. 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 1-800-424-9153); or go to http:// contained in vehicles and certain products of www.safercar.gov; or write to: IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND component wear contain, or emit, chemicals Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey known to the State of California to cause WASHINGTON, D.C. Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, cancer and birth defects, or other If you believe that your vehicle has a D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other reproductive harm. defect that could cause a crash or cause information about motor vehicle safety injury or death, you should immediately from http://www.safercar.gov. WARRANTY INFORMATION inform the National Highway Traffic See the Warranty Information for the terms and Safety Administration (NHTSA) in provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable addition to notifying FCA US LLC. to this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further information. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 347 IN CANADA PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Owner's Manuals These Owner's Manuals have been prepared If you believe that your vehicle has a To order the following manuals, you may use with the assistance of service and engineering safety defect, you should contact the either the website or the phone numbers listed specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US below. Customer Service Department LLC vehicles. immediately. Canadian customers who Service Manuals To access your Owner's Information online, visit wish to report a safety defect to the These comprehensive Service Manuals provide www.mopar.com/om Canadian government should contact a complete working knowledge of the vehicle, To order a hard copy of your Owner’s Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect system, and/or components and is written in Information, visit: Investigations and Recalls at straightforward language with illustrations, 1-800-333-0510 or go to diagrams, and charts.  www.techauthority.com (US) wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/ Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Or PCDB-BDPP. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with Call Tech Authority toll free at: diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.  1-800-890-4038 (US) These manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle  1-800-387-1143 (Canada) systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

10 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348

348 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE GENERAL INFORMATION Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las d`Innovation, Science and Economic siguientes dos condiciones: The following regulatory statement applies to all Development applicables aux appareils radio 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée cause interferencia perjudicial y vehicle: aux deux conditions suivantes: 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que Rules and with Innovation, Science and brouillage, et Economic Development Canada license-exempt pueda causar su operación no deseada. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout following two conditions: brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le NOTE: brouillage est susceptible d'en compro- Changes or modifications not expressly 1. This device may not cause harmful mettre le fonctionnement. approved by the party responsible for compli- interference, and ance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349

349 INDEX  Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Front Air Bag...... 224 Alarm Mobile Phone ...... 167 If Deployment Occurs ...... 229 Arm The System...... 21, 22  WARRANTY INFORMATION...... 346 Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 226 Rearm The System ...... 22 Maintaining Your Air Bag System...... 231 Security Alarm ...... 21, 79 A Maintenance ...... 231 Alarm System About Your Brakes...... 91, 335 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light...... 224 Security Alarm ...... 21 ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control...... 103 Side Air Bags ...... 226 All Wheel Drive (AWD) ...... 298 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)...... 103 Transporting Pets ...... 248 Alterations/Modifications Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 293 Air Bag Light...... 76, 223, 249 Vehicle...... 9 Adding Washing Fluid ...... 283 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)...286 Android Auto ...... 177, 179 Additives, Fuel ...... 337 Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 287 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...... 293, 340 Adjust Air Conditioner Refrigerant ...... 287, 288 Disposal...... 294 Forward...... 32, 34 Air Conditioner System ...... 287 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)...... 198 Rearward...... 32, 34 Air Conditioning...... 53 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...... 79 Advance Phone Connectivity ...... 175 Air Conditioning Filter...... 58, 288 Apple CarPlay...... 177, 181 Air Bag...... 224 Air Conditioning System...... 53 Arming System Advance Front Air Bag...... 224 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips...... 57 Security Alarm ...... 21 Air Bag Operation ...... 226 Air Filter ...... 286 Assist, Hill Start...... 203 Air Bag Warning Light...... 223 Air Pressure Audio Settings...... 160 Enhanced Accident Response...... 230, 274 Tires ...... 320 Audio Systems (Radio) ...... 132 Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...... 274

11 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350

350

Auto Down Power Windows ...... 62 Bluetooth Cargo Automatic Door Locks...... 26 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Vehicle Loading ...... 122 Automatic Headlights ...... 47 Or Audio Device After Pairing ...... 170 CD ...... 162 Automatic High Beams ...... 46 Body Mechanism Lubrication ...... 289 Cellular Phone...... 197 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...... 56 B-Pillar Location...... 316 Certification Label...... 122 Automatic Transmission ...... 96 Brake Assist System ...... 199 Chains, Tire ...... 328 Adding Fluid ...... 297, 343 Brake Control System ...... 199 Chart, Tire Sizing...... 313 Fluid And Filter Change ...... 297 Brake Fluid ...... 296, 343 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Fluid Change ...... 297 Brake System ...... 295, 335 Indicator Light)...... 84 Fluid Level Check ...... 297 Fluid Check...... 296, 343 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety...... 248 Fluid Type...... 297, 343 Master Cylinder ...... 296 Checks, Safety ...... 248 Special Additives...... 297 Parking ...... 91 Child Restraint ...... 232 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Warning Light ...... 76, 335 Child Restraints Mode ...... 26, 100 Brake/Transmission Interlock ...... 96 Booster Seats ...... 236 AutoPark...... 88 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ...... 90 Child Seat Installation...... 246 Autostick Brightness, Interior Lights...... 50 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt..... 242 Operation ...... 100 Bulb Replacement ...... 308 Infant And Child Restraints...... 234 Axle Fluid ...... 343 Bulbs, Light...... 250, 308 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.. 238 Axle Lubrication ...... 343 Older Children And Child Restraints...... 235 C Seating Positions...... 237 B Camera, Rear...... 120 Clean Air Gasoline...... 337 Back-Up ...... 120 Capacities, Fluid ...... 340 Cleaning Battery...... 77, 283 Caps, Filler Wheels...... 327 Charging System Light...... 77 Fuel ...... 121 Climate Control ...... 53 Keyless Key Fob Replacement...... 14 Oil (Engine) ...... 280 Cold Weather Operation...... 89 Location ...... 283 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...... 294 Compact Spare Tire ...... 325 Belts, Seat ...... 248 Car Washes...... 332 Contract, Service...... 345 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 204 Carbon Monoxide Warning...... 250, 251 Controls ...... 151 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)...... 294 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351

351

Cooling System...... 292 Dimmer Switch Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 104 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)...... 293 Headlight...... 46 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)...... 200 Coolant Level ...... 293, 295 Dipsticks Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 78 Cooling Capacity...... 340 Oil (Engine) ...... 282 Emergency, In Case Of Disposal Of Used Coolant...... 294 Disabled Vehicle Towing ...... 273 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ...... 271 Drain, Flush, And Refill...... 293 Disc Drive ...... 162 Jacking...... 256 Inspection ...... 295 Disconnecting ...... 170 Jump Starting ...... 267, 268 Points To Remember...... 295 Disposal Towing ...... 273 Pressure Cap...... 294 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 294 Emission Control System Maintenance...... 84 Radiator Cap ...... 294 Disturb...... 174 Engine...... 280, 281 Selection Of Coolant Door Ajar...... 77 Air Cleaner ...... 286 (Antifreeze) ...... 293, 340, 341 Door Ajar Light ...... 77 Block Heater...... 90 Corrosion Protection...... 331 Door Locks Break-In Recommendations ...... 90 Cruise Control...... 103 Automatic ...... 26 Checking Oil Level ...... 282 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...... 103 Doors ...... 22 Compartment ...... 280, 281 Cruise Light ...... 83 Drag & Drop...... 149 Compartment Identification...... 280 Customer Assistance...... 344 Drive Modes...... 191 Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 293 Customer Programmable Features...... 133 Driver Memory Presets ...... 159 Cooling...... 292 Cybersecurity...... 132 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt...... 31, 32 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 250, 251 Driving Fails To Start...... 89 D Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Flooded, Starting ...... 89 Daytime Running Lights...... 46 Standing Water ...... 130 Fuel Requirements ...... 336 Dealer Service ...... 284 Jump Starting ...... 267, 268 Deck Lid E Oil ...... 284, 340, 341 Power Release ...... 65 Electric Brake Control System...... 199 Oil Filler Cap ...... 280 Defroster, Windshield...... 249 Anti-Lock Brake System...... 198 Oil Filter ...... 286 De-Icer, Remote Start ...... 21 Electronic Roll Mitigation...... 200, 204 Oil Selection...... 284, 340 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers...... 51 Electric Remote Mirrors ...... 41 Oil Synthetic...... 285 11 Deleting A Phone ...... 170 Electrical Power Outlets...... 60 Overheating ...... 269 Diagnostic System, Onboard ...... 83 Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses)... 299 Starting...... 86, 87 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352

352

Enhanced Accident Response Feature .. 230, 274 Fold-Flat Seats...... 31, 33 H Ethanol ...... 337 Forward Collision Warning ...... 208 Hazard Exhaust Gas Cautions...... 250, 251 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...... 271 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Exhaust System...... 250, 291 Fuel...... 336 Standing Water ...... 130 Exterior Lighting...... 45 Additives...... 337 Hazard Warning Flashers...... 252 Exterior Lights...... 45, 250 Clean Air...... 337 Head Restraints ...... 38 Ethanol...... 337 Head Rests ...... 38 F Filler Cap (Gas Cap)...... 121 Headlights Filler Location Fuel ...... 121 Gasoline ...... 336 Automatic ...... 47 Filters Materials Added ...... 337 Cleaning...... 332 Air Cleaner...... 286 Methanol ...... 337 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...... 46 Air Conditioning...... 58, 288 Octane Rating...... 336, 341 Lights On Reminder ...... 48 Engine Oil...... 286, 341 Requirements...... 336 On With Wipers...... 47 Engine Oil Disposal ...... 286 Specifications...... 341 Passing...... 47 Flashers...... 252 Tank Capacity...... 340 Switch...... 45 Hazard Warning...... 252 Fueling...... 121 Time Delay...... 48 Turn Signals ...... 48, 82, 250 Fuses ...... 298 Washers...... 283 Flash-To-Pass ...... 47 Heated Mirrors...... 41 Flooded Engine Starting ...... 89 G Heated Seats ...... 35 Fluid Capacities ...... 340 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)...... 41 Heater...... 53 Fluid Leaks ...... 250 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...... 121 Heater, Engine Block...... 90 Fluid Level Checks Gasoline, Clean Air...... 337 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .. 46 Brake ...... 296 Gasoline, Reformulated...... 337 Hill Start Assist...... 203 Cooling System...... 293 Gear Ranges...... 97 Hitches Engine Oil...... 282 Glass Cleaning...... 334 Trailer Towing ...... 124 Transfer Case...... 298 Gross Axle Weight Rating...... 122, 124 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)...... 41 Fluid, Brake ...... 343 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating...... 122, 123 Hood Prop ...... 64 Fog Lights ...... 48 GVWR...... 122 Hood Release...... 64 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353

353

I K Lights ...... 250 Ignition ...... 16 Key Fob Air Bag ...... 76, 223, 249 Switch ...... 16 Arm The System ...... 21 Automatic Headlights ...... 47 Information Center, Vehicle ...... 69 Programming Additional Key Fobs...... 15 Brake Assist Warning...... 202 Inside Rearview Mirror...... 39, 252 Unlatch The Trunk ...... 14 Brake Warning...... 76, 335 Instrument Cluster Key Fob Battery Service Bulb Replacement ...... 308 Descriptions ...... 67, 82 (Remote Keyless Entry)...... 14 Courtesy/Reading...... 49 Display ...... 69, 71 Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ... 15 Cruise ...... 83 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning...... 333 Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 24 Daytime Running ...... 46 Interior Appearance Care...... 333 Enter The Trunk...... 14 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 46 Interior Lights ...... 49 Keys...... 13 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator...78 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...... 51 Replacement...... 15 Exterior ...... 45, 250 iPod/USB/MP3 Control ...... 60 Fog...... 48 Bluetooth Streaming Audio ...... 60 L Headlight Switch...... 45 Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 48 Headlights ...... 45, 48 J Lane Change Assist ...... 49 Headlights On With Wipers ...... 47 Jack Location...... 257 Lap/Shoulder Belts...... 217 High Beam...... 46 Jack Operation...... 258 Latches...... 250 High Beam/Low Beam Select...... 46 Jacking Instructions...... 258 Hood...... 64 Instrument Cluster...... 45 Jump Starting ...... 267, 268 Lead Free Gasoline...... 336 Intensity Control ...... 50 Leaks, Fluid ...... 250 Interior...... 49 Life Of Tires...... 323 License ...... 311 Light Bulbs...... 250, 308 Lights On Reminder ...... 48

11 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354

354

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ...... 80 M Modifications/Alterations Map...... 49 Maintenance...... 64 Vehicle...... 9 Park...... 47, 82 Maintenance Free Battery ...... 283 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...... 210 Passing...... 47 Maintenance Schedule...... 275, 276 Mopar Parts ...... 346 Reading...... 49 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....80 Multi-Function Control Lever...... 46 Seat Belt Reminder...... 77 Manual Security Alarm...... 79 Backward ...... 32, 33 N Service ...... 308 Forward ...... 32, 33 New Vehicle Break-In Period ...... 90 Traction Control...... 202 Park Release ...... 270 Turn Signals ...... 46, 48, 82, 250 Rearward...... 32 O Vanity Mirror...... 40 Service ...... 347 Occupant Restraints ...... 214 Warning Instrument Cluster Tilt ...... 33 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)...... 336, 341 Descriptions...... 78, 82 Manual Transmission ...... 92, 296, 298 Oil Change Indicator...... 70 Load Shed Battery Saver On...... 74 Fluid Level Check ...... 296, 298 Reset ...... 70 Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ...... 74 Map/Reading Lights ...... 49 Oil Filter, Change...... 286 Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ...... 74 Media Mode...... 162 Oil Filter, Selection ...... 286 Loading Vehicle ...... 122, 123 Memory Seat ...... 30 Oil Pressure Light...... 78 Capacities ...... 123 Memory Settings...... 30 Oil, Engine...... 284, 341 Tires ...... 316 Methanol ...... 337 Capacity...... 340 Locks Mirrors ...... 39 Checking...... 282 Auto Unlock...... 26 Electric Powered...... 41 Dipstick...... 282 Automatic Door ...... 26 Electric Remote ...... 41 Disposal...... 286 Power Door...... 23 Heated...... 41 Filter ...... 286, 341 Low Tire Pressure System ...... 210 Outside...... 40 Filter Disposal...... 286 Lubrication, Body...... 289 Rearview...... 39, 252 Identification Logo...... 284 Lug Nuts/Bolts ...... 335 Vanity ...... 40 Materials Added To...... 286 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355

355

Pressure Warning Light ...... 78 Power R Recommendation...... 284, 340 Brakes...... 335 Radial Ply Tires...... 321 Synthetic ...... 285 Deck Lid Release...... 65 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)...... 294 Viscosity ...... 340 Distribution Center (Fuses)...... 303 Radio Onboard Diagnostic System ...... 83 Door Locks ...... 23 Presets ...... 159 Operating Precautions...... 83 Mirrors...... 41 Radio Controls ...... 151 Operator Manual Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...... 60 Radio Mode...... 151 Owner's Manual ...... 347 Seats ...... 34 Radio Operation...... 151, 197 Outside Rearview Mirrors ...... 40 Steering...... 103 Radio Remote Controls ...... 150 Overheating, Engine ...... 269 Sunroof...... 63 Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...... 52 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...... 27 Rear Camera...... 120 P Windows...... 62 Rear ParkSense System...... 115 Paddle Shift Mode...... 100 Power Seats Rear Seats, Folding...... 33 Paddle Shifters ...... 100 Forward ...... 34 Recreational Towing...... 129 Paint Care...... 331 Lumbar...... 34 Reformulated Gasoline ...... 337 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Rearward...... 34 Refrigerant...... 287, 288 Mobile Phone ...... 167 Power Steering Fluid...... 343 Release, Hood...... 64 Parking Brake...... 91 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...... 220 Reminder, Lights On ...... 48 ParkSense System, Rear ...... 115 Preparation For Jacking ...... 257 Reminder, Seat Belt...... 216 Passenger Seat Presets ...... 159 Remote Control Easy Entry ...... 37 Pretensioners Starting System ...... 18 Passing Light ...... 47 Seat Belts...... 221 Remote Keyless Entry ...... 13 Personalized Main Menu Bar ...... 149 Programmable Features ...... 133 Arm The Alarm ...... 21 Pets ...... 248 Programming Additional Key Fobs...... 15 Phone Mode ...... 165 Unlatch The Trunk ...... 14 Pinch Protection ...... 64 Placard, Tire And Loading Information...... 316 11 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356

356

Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ...... 150 Schedule, Maintenance...... 275, 276 Height Adjustment...... 34 Remote Starting Seat Belt Reminder...... 77 Power...... 34 Exit Remote Start Mode ...... 19 Seat Belts ...... 215, 248 Rear Folding ...... 31, 33 Uconnect Customer Programmable Features.... 20 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)...... 221 Seatback Release...... 32, 33 Uconnect Settings...... 20 Child Restraints...... 232 Tilting...... 31, 32, 34, 37 Remote Starting System...... 18 Energy Management Feature ...... 221 Vented ...... 36 Remote Trunk Release ...... 65 Extender ...... 220 Ventilated ...... 36 Replacement Bulbs ...... 308 Front Seat...... 215, 217, 219 Security Alarm...... 21, 79 Replacement Keys...... 15 Inspection...... 248 Arm The System...... 21 Replacement Tires...... 323 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation...... 219 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...... 16 Reporting Safety Defects...... 346 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting...... 220 Sentry Key Replacement...... 15 Restraints, Child ...... 232 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 217 Service Assistance ...... 344 Restraints, Head...... 38 Operating Instructions...... 219 Service Contract...... 345 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ...... 271 Pregnant Women...... 220 Service Manuals ...... 347 Rotation, Tires ...... 329 Pretensioners ...... 221 Settings, Audio...... 160 Rear Seat ...... 217 Shift Indicator Light...... 94 S Reminder...... 216 Shifting...... 95 Safety ...... 149 Seat Belt Extender...... 220 Automatic Transmission ...... 95, 96 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle...... 248 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 221 Shoulder Belts ...... 217 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...... 250 Untwisting Procedure ...... 220 Side View Mirror Adjustment...... 40 Safety Defects, Reporting...... 346 Seat Belts Maintenance ...... 333 Signals, Turn ...... 48, 82, 250 Safety Features ...... 149 Seats ...... 31, 34, 35, 37 Sirius Satellite Radio...... 153 Safety Information, Tire ...... 311 Adjustment...... 31, 32, 34 Favorites...... 157 Safety Tips...... 248 Easy Entry...... 35 Replay...... 155 Safety, Exhaust Gas...... 250 Head Restraints...... 38 Satellite Radio ...... 153 Heated...... 35 Saved Radio Stations ...... 159 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357

357

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Steering ...... 27 Tire And Loading Information Placard...... 316 Browse in SXM ...... 157 Column Lock...... 27 Tire Markings ...... 312 Favorites ...... 157 Power ...... 103 Tire Safety Information...... 311 Replay ...... 155 Tilt Column ...... 27 Tire Service Kit...... 261, 262, 263 Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...... 328 Wheel, Heated...... 28 Tires ...... 250, 319, 325, 330 Snow Tires...... 324 Wheel, Tilt...... 27 Aging (Life Of Tires)...... 323 Spare Tires ...... 257, 325, 326 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 150 Air Pressure ...... 319 Spark Plugs ...... 341 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ...... 150 Chains ...... 328 Specifications Storage ...... 59, 331 Changing ...... 256, 258 Fuel (Gasoline) ...... 341 Storage, Vehicle...... 57, 331 Compact Spare...... 325 Oil...... 341 Store Radio Presets...... 159 General Information ...... 319, 325 Speed Control Storing Your Vehicle...... 331 High Speed ...... 321 Accel/Decel...... 105 Stuck, Freeing...... 271 Inflation Pressure ...... 320 Cancel ...... 105 Sun Roof...... 63, 64 Jacking...... 257, 258 Resume...... 105 Venting ...... 64 Life Of Tires ...... 323 Set...... 104 Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 224 Load Capacity...... 316, 317 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 103, 104 Synthetic Engine Oil...... 285 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).... 81, 210 Sport Mode...... 102 System, Remote Starting ...... 18 Quality Grading ...... 330 Starting...... 86, 87 Radial ...... 321 Automatic Transmission...... 86 T Replacement ...... 323 Button ...... 16 Telescoping Steering Column ...... 27 Rotation...... 329 Cold Weather ...... 89 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)...... 56 Safety ...... 311, 319 Engine Fails To Start ...... 89 Tilt Steering Column ...... 27 Sizes...... 313 Remote ...... 18 Time Delay Snow Tires ...... 324 Starting And Operating ...... 86, 87 Headlight...... 48 Spare Tires ...... 257, 325, 326 Starting Procedures...... 86, 87 11 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358

358

Spinning...... 322 Trailer Towing Guide ...... 125 U Trailer Towing...... 127 Trailer Weight...... 125 Uconnect Tread Wear Indicators...... 322 Transfer Case Phone Call Features ...... 172 Wheel Nut Torque ...... 335 Fluid ...... 298, 343 Things You Should Know About Your To Open Hood...... 64 Maintenance ...... 298 Uconnect Phone ...... 175 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...... 126 Transmission ...... 96 Uconnect Settings ...... 20 Towing ...... 123 Automatic ...... 95, 96, 297 Uconnect Phone...... 167, 169 Disabled Vehicle...... 273 Fluid ...... 343 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Guide...... 125 Maintenance ...... 297 Call Currently In Progress ...... 173 Recreational...... 129 Manual ...... 92 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Weight...... 125 Shifting...... 95 No Call Currently In Progress...... 173 Towing Behind A Motorhome...... 129 Transporting Pets...... 248 Bluetooth Communication Link ...... 177 Traction ...... 130 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 322 Call Continuation ...... 175 Traction Control ...... 204 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid)...... 65 Call Controls ...... 172 Trailer Towing ...... 123 Trunk Release Remote Control...... 65 Call Termination ...... 175 Hitches...... 124 Turn Signals...... 48, 82 Cancel Command ...... 167 Minimum Requirements...... 126 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Tips ...... 129 Or Audio Device After Pairing...... 170 Trailer And Tongue Weight ...... 126 Help Command...... 167 Wiring...... 128 Join Calls ...... 174 21_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359

359

Making A Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect System...... 147 Washers, Windshield ...... 51, 283 A Favorite...... 171 Uconnect Voice Command...... 28 Washing Vehicle...... 332 Making A Second Call While Current Call Uniform Tire Quality Grades...... 330 Water Is In Progress ...... 174 Unleaded Gasoline ...... 336 Driving Through ...... 130 Managing Your Favorites...... 171 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...... 220 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care...... 327 Natural Speech ...... 167 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...... 327 Operation ...... 166 V Wind Buffeting ...... 62 Overview...... 165 Vanity Mirrors ...... 40 Window Fogging...... 57 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Vehicle Certification Label ...... 122 Windows ...... 62 Phone ...... 167 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...... 335 Power...... 62 Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device..169 Vehicle Loading ...... 122, 123, 317 Windshield Defroster ...... 249 Phonebook Download ...... 171 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations...... 9 Windshield Washers ...... 51 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...... 174 Vehicle Security Alarm ...... 21 Fluid...... 283 Power-Up...... 177 Vehicle Storage...... 57, 331 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 290 Recent Calls ...... 173 Voice Command...... 179, 181 Windshield Wipers ...... 51 Redial...... 175 Voice Recognition System (VR) ...... 28 Wipers Blade Replacement...... 290 To Remove A Favorite ...... 172 Wipers, Intermittent ...... 51 Toggling Between Calls ...... 174 W Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...... 52 Touch-Tone Number Entry...... 173 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..175 Descriptions)...... 80 Voice Command ...... 175 Warranty Information...... 346 Uconnect Settings WARRANTY INFORMATION  ...... 346 Customer Programmable Features ...... 20 Washer Adding Fluid...... 283

This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer. This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and for common questions. Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting and Canadian www.techauthority.com Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143. Dodge brand dealer.

2021 DODGE CHALLENGER

21_LA_OM_EN_USC FIRST EDITION

Canada Store enter and the search ® owners.mopar.ca or Google Play ®